3 - Industrial Automation and Control

3 - Industrial Automation and Control
Energy Automation
Catalogue | 2015
MiCOM
series P10, series P20
Digital protection relays
Make the most of your energy
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
General Content
Range description
1
MiCOM series 10
2
MiCOM series 20
3
Order form
4
9
10
NRJED112402EN
3
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
1
4
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Range description
Maximize protection
Selection guide for all applications
10
Overcurrent applications
12
Feeder protection
Incomer protection
Transformer protection 
Generator protection
12
13
14
17
Motor applications
19
Line differential applications
21
Voltage & Frequency applications
22
MiCOM Series 10
25
MiCOM series 20
99
Order form
NRJED112402EN
6
1
187
5
Maximize protection
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Increase
energy
availability
1
100% available
energy
Fast response
6
Maximum
dependability
Your electrical equipment is under control.
With MiCOM protection relays, you get
maximum energy availability for your process.
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Maximize protection
(cont.)
MiCOM protection relays
1
Number one in reliability
Maximize energy availability and the profits
generated by your installation while protecting
life and property.
The MiCOM range of relays offers varying levels of functionality and
hardware options to best suit the protection requirements, and allows the
customer to choose the most cost effective solution for their application.
The 10 and 20 series hardware platforms are the building blocks of the
MiCOM protection relay range providing the capability for a wide variety
of protection, control, measurement, monitoring and communication funtions.
The versatile hardware allows for application in many installations and a
common relay management software (MiCOM S1 Studio) makes for easy
configuration and application.
A standard and simple user interface across the range makes this ideal
in any environment, from the more complex bay level control and mimic to
the more simple LCD display and interrogation facility.
Keep informed to manage better
With MiCOM, you get intuitive access to all system information in
your language so that you can manage your electrical installation
effectively. If a problem occurs, clear and complete information
puts you in a position to make the right decisions immediately.
The electrical supply is restored without delay.
Maintain installation availability
MiCOM maintains high energy availability thanks to its diagnostics
function that continuously monitors network status.
In-depth analysis capabilities and high reliability ensure that
equipment is de-energized only when absolutely necessary.
Risks are minimized and servicing time reduced by programming
maintenance operations.
1999
Launch of first
MiCOM relay
protection
2014
Over 600,000
MiCOM units installed
around the world
Electrical utilities, petrochemical plants, hospitals, small industry, infrastructures.
NRJED112402EN
7
Maximize protection
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Start-up has never been so fast
The MiCOM S1 Studio programming and operating software provides a single
environment for the entire range. The result is a simple, user-friendly approach
for fast commissioning.
Configuration
Equipment
setup
Protection
activation
Summary
of functions
Upload data on-line from
the relay or off-line from
a data model template
Enable protection
functions
Easily and quickly apply
protection, control and
monitoring settings
Application
compliance
Fine tune
capability
DM101247EN
DM101243EN
Automatic hardware
description
DM101242EN
1
(cont.)
1 to 5 minutes
8
5 minutes
20 minutes
NRJED112402EN
Maximize protection
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
(cont.)
1
Setting file
ready to be
downloaded to
MiCOM relay
DM101246EN
DM101245EN
DM101244EN
Operation
download
export
Straightforward
facility for
commissioning
Analysis of
waveform capture
Real-time
supervision
Management
of events
Display, analysis and printing
of disturbance records
Supervision of the status
of all the relays in the
electrical installation
Display of event records
in chronological order
Complete peace of mind during operation
NRJED112402EN
9
Selection guide for all
applications
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
series 10
Page 24
Each application example is described by:
b a single-line diagram indicating:
v equipment to be protected
v network configuration
v position of measurement sensors
PC151012b
b standard and specific MiCOM functions to be implemented to protect the
application.
Warning: the MiCOM P911 is now rebranded as Vamp 11V. For further information
please see Vamp documentation.
DE88006
The list of functions is given for information purposes.
Earthing, wether direct or via an impedance, is represented by the same pictogram,
i.e. the pictogram corresponding to a direct connection.
DE88005
1
The selection guide proposes the MiCOM types suited to your protection needs,
based on the characteristics of your application.
The most typical applications are presented with the corresponding MiCOM.
Protections
Current
b
b
b
Voltage
b
Frequency
b
Specifics
self
dual
power
power
P115
P116
over / under
voltage &
frequency
Applications
Overcurrent
P.12
Motor
P. 19
Line differential
P. 21
Voltage & Frequency
P. 22
Feeder, Incomer, Transformer, Generator
P111
Vamp 11V
Characteristics
Logic inputs/outputs
Inputs
0 to 8
2
6
0 to 6
Outputs
4 to 8
4
7
4 to 8
4
4
4
Temperature sensors
Channel
CT inputs
1
Communication ports
Control
Other
10
4
VT inputs
1
Withdrawable case
1
1
Yes
No
No
Boolean logic equation
No
NRJED112402EN
Selection guide for all
applications
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
(cont.)
series 20
1
b
b
b
b
b
recloser
P122
P123
DM101237EN
DE88006
PM100520
DM101239EN
DM101241EN
DM101238EN
U
b
U
DE88005
PM100517
Page 92
b
b
b
b
directional
earth fault
and phase
overcurrent
b
over /
under
voltage
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
over /
under
voltage &
frequency
frequency
P921
P922
P923
two ended
current
differential
rate of
change of
P127
P220
P225
P521
3
5
7 to12
5
7
9
9
4
4
4
6
5
2
5
5
6
6
9
4
8
8
6
10
4
4
4
1
0
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1 to 2
1
Yes
Yes
NRJED112402EN
11
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
Protection functions
ANSI
code
Phase under/over voltage (AND & OR mode)
27/59
Directional Power (Under/Over act./react. power)
32
Wattmetric Earth Fault
32N/67W
Undercurrent / Loss of load
37
Negative phase sequence overcurrent
46
Broken conductor
46BC
Negative sequence overvoltage
47
Thermal overload
49
Earth overcurrent / Sensitive earth fault
50N/51N
3 Phase overcurrent
50/51
Circuit breaker failure
50BF
Voltage controlled overcurrent
51V
Residual over voltage / Derived Vo sequence overvoltage
59N
Restricted earthfault
64
Earth fault directional overcurrent
67N
3 phase directional overcurrent
67P
Wattmetric earthfault
67W/32N
Autoreclose
79
Under/over frequency
81O/U
Rate of change of Frequency (df/dt+t)
81R
Output relay latching
86
CB command (local Open / Close)
Current transformer supervision
CTS
Switch on to fault
SOTF
Trip Circuit Supervision
TCS
Voltage transformer supervision
VTS/60
Circuit breaker monitoring
Cold load pick-up
CLPU
Inrush blocking
(1) Model E only
(2) Models E - A - B - N only
(3) Model E - A - B only
(4) Model A - E only
P111
P115
CT powered or
Dual powered
b (1)
b (1)
b (2)
b
b
b
P116
CT powered or
Dual powered
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b (3)
b
P123
b
b
b
b
b
b
P122
P127
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b (4)
b (4)
b
b
b
b
b
b (4)
b
b (4)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Feeder protection
Feeder protection
b Feeder short-circuit and overload protection.
Protection of low-capacitance feeders in impedance earthed or solidly
earthed neutral systems: MiCOM P111, P115, P116, P122, P123 or P127
P111
P115
P116
P122
P123
b voltage and frequency monitoring.
DE60528M
DE88401M
b no voltage and frequency monitoring
P127
Protection of high-capacitance feeders in impedance earthed or
compensated or isolated neutral systems: MiCOM P127
b Specific feeder protection: 67P/67N/67W.
DE60529M
1
Overcurrent applications
12
P127
NRJED112402EN
Overcurrent applications
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
(cont.)
Incomer protection
1
Incomer protection
b Busbar short-circuit protection
Protection of 2 incomers: MiCOM P127
b No voltage and
frequency monitoring
b With automatic source transfer (ATS)
without coupling
DE60532M
P127
b Line voltage and
frequency monitoring
DE60531M
P111
P115
P116
P122
P123
b Busbar voltage and
frequency monitoring
DE60530M
DE88404M
Incomer protection: MiCOM P111, P115, P116, P122, P123 or P127
P127
P127
P127
ATS
ATS
Parallel-incomer protection with disconnection function: MiCOM P127
b Specific line or source protection: 67P, 67N/67W.
b Disconnection-specific functions: 27, 32, 59, 59N, 81O/U
DE88408M
DE60533M
Parallel incomer protection: MiCOM P127
P127
P127
P127
Protection of an incomer or coupling circuit breaker with load shedding
based on frequency variations: MiCOM P127
DE60536M
DE60535M
b Load-shedding-specific functions: 81O/U
P127
P127
Ring incomer protection: MiCOM P127
DE60537M
b Line or source protection: 67P, 67N/67W
b Directional logic discrimination
P127
P127
NRJED112402EN
P127
P127
P127
P127
13
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
Overcurrent applications
(cont.)
Transformer protection
1
Transformer feeder protection
b transformer short-circuit and overload protection
b internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) (*)
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T) (*)
(*) Via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer
Transformer feeder protection without voltage monitoring:
MiCOM P111, P116, P122, P123
P111
P116
P122
P123
Earth fault protection:
b neutral point: 50N/51N
DM101217EN
DM101218EN
Earth fault protection:
b primary: 50N/51N
P111
P116
P122
P123
*
( )
*
( )
Transformer feeder protection with voltage monitoring: MICOM P127
DM101219EN
Earth fault protection:
b primary: 50N/51N
P127
*
( )
Note: for long feeders, the 50N/51N function may be replaced by the 67N
Transformer feeder protection with voltage monitoring and additional
current measurement: MiCOM P127
P127
*
( )
Earth fault protection:
b primary: 50N/51N
b secondary: 50N/51N
DM101220EN
DM101220EN
Earth fault protection:
b primary: 50N/51N
b tank earth leakage: 50N/51N
P127
*
( )
Note: for long feeders, the 50N/51N function may be replaced by the 67N
14
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
Overcurrent applications
(cont.)
1
Transformer incomer protection
b transformer short-circuit and overload protection
b internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) (*)
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T) (*)
(*) Via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer
Transformer incomer protection without voltage monitoring:
MiCOM P111, P116, P122, P123
Earth fault protection:
b neutral point: 50N/51N
DM101223EN
DM101222EN
Earth fault protection:
b secondary: 50N/51N
*
( )
*
( )
P111
P116
P122
P123
P111
P116
P122
P123
Transformer incomer protection with voltage monitoring: MiCOM P127
Earth fault protection:
b secondary:
v 64N
v 50N/51N
DM101225EN
DM101224EN
Earth fault protection:
b secondary: 50N/51N
*
( )
*
( )
P127
P127
Note: for long feeders, the 50N/51N function may be replaced by the 67N
NRJED112402EN
15
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
Overcurrent applications
(cont.)
Transformer incomer protection
1
b transformer short-circuit and overload protection
b internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) (*)
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T) (*)
(*) Via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer
Protection of 2 non-coupled transformers incomers: MiCOM P127
DM101226EN
b automatic source transfer (ATS) without coupling
*
*
( )
( )
P127
P127
Parallel transformer incomer protection: MiCOM P127
DM101227EN
b transformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67
b transformer secondary earth fault protection: 50N/51N, 59N
*
*
( )
( )
P127
P127
DM101228EN
b transformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67
b transformer secondary earth fault protection: 67N, 64N
*
*
( )
( )
P127
16
P127
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
Overcurrent applications
(cont.)
Generator protection
1
Generator-transformer unit protection
b generator and transformer protection against internal faults
b network fault protection
b driving machine fault protection
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T) (*)
b voltage and frequency monitoring.
(*) Via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer
Protection of a separate generator: MiCOM P127
Earth fault protection:
b 50N/51N
DM101230EN
DM101229EN
Earth fault protection:
b 50N/51N
b 59N
38 /
49T(*)
38 /
49T(*)
P127
P127
Protection of a generator-transformer unit coupled to other generators or to
a network: MiCOM P127
b Short-circuit detection on generator side: 67
b Control fault protection
38 /
49T(*)
P127
NRJED112402EN
Earth fault protection:
b 64 REF, 64N
b 50N/51N
DM101234EN
DM101232EN
Earth fault protection:
b 50N/51N
b 59N
38 /
49T(*)
P127
17
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
Overcurrent applications
(cont.)
Generator-transformer unit protection
1
b generator and transformer protection against internal faults
b network fault protection
b driving machine fault protection
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T) (*)
b voltage and frequency monitoring.
(*) Via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer
Separate generator-transformer unit protection: MiCOM P127
Earth fault protection:
b 50N/51N
DM101231EN
Note: monitoring of generator insulation must be ensured by another device
38 /
49T(*)
49T (*)
P127
Protection of a generator-transformer unit coupled to other generators
or to a network: MiCOM P127
DM101235EN
b Short-circuit detection on generator side: 32, 67
b Control fault protection
b Internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63)
b generator earth fault protection: 50N/51N
b transformer secondary earth fault protection
v 50N/51N
v 59N
38 /
49T(*)
26
63
( )
49T *
P127
18
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
Motor applications
Protection functions
ANSI
code
Speed switch inputs
12/14


Optional RTD
38/49T
6
10
Phase under/over voltage (AND & OR mode)
27/59
Re-acceleration autorisation
27LV
Undercurrent / Loss of load
37


Negative phase sequence overcurrent
46


Start / Stalled Protection / Motor Re-Acceleration
48/ 51LR


Thermal overload
49


Circuit breaker failure
50BF


P220
P225
1


3-Phase overcurrent
50 / 51


Earth overcurrent / Sensitive earth fault
50N / 51N


Locked Rotor during Start-up
51S


Number of Starts Limitation
66


Output relay latching
86


Trip Circuit Supervision
TCS


Motor protection
b internal motor fault protection
b power supply fault protection
b driven load fault protection
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T)
Motor protection without voltage monitoring: MiCOM P220
b auto-transformer
starting.
b two-way.
DE88052
DE88051
DE88050
b direct starting.
P220
P220
P220
38
49T
38
49T
38
49T
Motor protection with voltage monitoring: MiCOM P225
DE60546
DE60545
P225
38
49T
NRJED112402EN
b two-way
DE60547
b auto-transformer
starting
b direct starting
P225
38
49T
P225
38
49T
19
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
Motor applications
(cont.)
Motor-transformer unit protection
1
b motor and transformer protection against internal fault
b power supply fault protection
b driven load fault protection
b internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63) (*)
b RTD temperature monitoring
(*) Via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer
Motor-transformer unit protection without voltage monitoring:
MiCOM P220
b transformer primary earth fault protection: 50N/51N
DE88059
Note: monitoring of motor insulation must be ensured by another device.
P220
38/
49T
Motor-transformer unit protection with voltage and transformer monitoring:
MiCOM P225 and P921 for neutral voltage protection
b motor earth fault protection: 59N
b transformer primary earth fault protection: 50N/51N
b transformer monitoring: Buchholz, thermostat, temperature measurement (*)
DE60549
(*) Via logic inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer
P225
P921
26
27LV
49T
46
49T
20
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
Line differential applications
Protection functions
ANSI code
P521
Undercurrent detection
37
b
Negative phase sequence overcurrent
46
b
Broken conductor detection
46BC
b
Thermal overload
49
b
Circuit breaker failure
50BF
b
Non-directional phase overcurent protection
50/51
b
Non-directional earth fault protection
50/51N
b
Output relay latching
86
b
Phase segregated current differential protection
87P
b
Current transformer supervision
CTS
b
Trip circuit supervision
TCS
b
1
Line differential protection
b Feeder protection
Differential monitoring: P521
DE88050bis
b Phase segregated current differential protection: 86P
P521
87P
Optical fiber
P521
87P
NRJED112402EN
21
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Selection guide
for all applications
1
Voltage & Frequency
applications
Protection functions
ANSI
code
Vamp
11V (1)
P921
P922
P923
Phase under/over voltage
(AND & OR mode)
27/59
b
b
b
b
Positive sequence under voltage
27D
b (2)
b
b
Negative sequence overvoltage
47
b (2)
b
b
Residual over voltage /
Derived Vo sequence overvoltage
59N
b (3)
b
b
Voltage transformer supervision
VTS/ 60
b
b
Under/over frequency
81U/O
b
b
Rate of change of Frequency (df/dt+t)
81R
Output relay latching
86
b
b (2)
b
b
b
b
b
(1) Please consult Vamp 11V leaflet for details
(2) Model A only
(3) Model L has no residual voltage input.
59N is based on derived Vo sequence over voltage only
Voltage & frequency monitoring
b voltage and frequency monitoring
Monitoring of the 3 phase voltages and the residual voltage on busbars:
MiCOM P921, P922, P923 and Vamp 11V
Vamp 11V
P921
b load-shedding-specific functions:
81U/O
DE88026M
DE88025M
b load-shedding-specific function:
27/59
Vamp 11V
P922
P923
DE88025M
b change rate of frequency function: 81R
22
P923
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
1
NRJED112402EN
23
TOOLS
This international site allows you
to access all the Schneider Electric
products in just 2 clicks
via comprehensive range datasheets, with direct links to:
ppcomplete library: technical
documents, catalogs, FAQs,
brochures…
pp selection guides from
the e-catalog.
ppproduct discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also find illustrated
overviews, news to which you
can subscribe, the list of country
contacts…
This animated tool helps you to select
the best Automation Intelligent
Electronic Device adapted to your
need. This CD includes description
of all Schneider Electric IEDs ranges
(Sepam, MiCOM, VAMP, Easergy).
This selector is also included in the
Schneider Electric web site.
DM101166EN
Automation panorama
Energy Automation
Panorama 2012
Ene
Pan rgy A
o ra u t o m
ma
a
201 tion
2
PE88096
2
schneider-electric.com
24
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM series 10
Range description
5
MiCOM series 10
25
Selection table
Sensor inputs 26
27
Environmental characteristics
28
MiCOM P111
30
Numerical three phase and earth fault overcurrent
relay description30
Ratings
31
Protection functions34
Control & Monitoring37
Setting ranges39
Base unit44
Presentation44
Dimensions & weight
45
Description  
46
Connection diagrams
47
MiCOM P115
Numerical CT and auxiliary voltage powered overcurrent
relay descrition
52
Ratings
53
52
Protection functions54
Control & Monitoring59
Setting ranges60
Base unit64
Presentation64
Dimensions & weight
65
Description  
66
Connection diagrams
67
MiCOM P116
Numerical CT and Vx auxiliary voltage-powered
overcurrent relay description
72
Ratings
73
72
Protection functions76
Control & Monitoring80
Setting ranges82
Base unit87
Presentation87
Dimensions & weight
88
Description  
89
Connection diagrams
90
MiCOM series 20
Order form
NRJED112402EN
99
187
25
2
Selection table
MiCOM series 10
Overcurrent
P115
P111
Protection
Undercurrent
Negative sequence overcurrent
2
Broken conductor
Thermal overload
ANSI
46
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
49
3 Phase overcurrent
50/51
50N/51N
Autoreclose
79
Lock-out
86
b
b
b
b
Inrush blocking
b
SOTF
Circuit breaker monitoring
Trip Circuit Supervision
Cold load pick-up
26
CT
Powered
or Dual
Powered
46BC
50BF
Switch on to fault
P116
b
37
Circuit breaker failure
Earth fault
Model L Model N Model B Model A Model E
CT
Powered
or Dual
Powered
TCS
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
Selection table
(cont.)
MiCOM series 10 sensor inputs, outputs
Each MiCOM series 10 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement
sensors required for the application.
Overcurrent
P115
P111
Model L Model N Model B Model A Model E
CT Inputs
4
4
Opto Inputs ( max)
Output Contacts (max)
4
6
CT
Powered
or Dual
Powered
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
2
6
4
8
6
4
7
1
1
Magnetic Flags
USB Local Port
NRJED112402EN
CT
Powered
or Dual
Powered
4
Output for Striker triggering /low energy 12-24Vdc CB coil/MiTOP
Communication port RS485: Modbus/IEC103
P116
up to 5
Option
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
27
2
MiCOM series 10
2
Environmental characteristics
Insulation
Standard
Value
Insulation resistance
EN 60255-5: 2001
> 500 M at 500 Vdc (Using only electronic/
brushless insulation tester).
High Voltage (Dielectric) Withstand
EN 60255-27: 2005
2 kV rms AC, 1 minute:
b Between all case terminals connected together
and the case earth.
b Between all terminals of independent circuits with terminals on each independent circuit
connected together.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
EN 60255-27:2005
b
b
b
b
b
Front time: 1.2 μs
Time to half-value: 50 μs
Peak value: 5 kV
Source Characteristics: 500 Ohm, 0.5 J
Common and differential mode: power supply,
terminal block (excluding RS485), binary inputs,
relays
Creepage Distances and Clearances
EN 60255-27:2005
b Pollution degree 2
b Overvoltage category III
b Impulse test voltage 5 kV
EMC Tests
Standard
Value
1 MHz Burst High Frequency Disturbance Test
EN 60255-22-1: 2008 Class III
b
b
b
b
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge
EN 60255-22-2: 2008 Class 3
b 8 kV discharge in air to all communication ports.
b 6 kV point contact discharge to any part of the
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: 2 s
Source impedance: 200
front of the product
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements
EN 60255-22-4: 2008 Test severity
Class III
b Amplitude: 2 kV,
b Burst frequency 5 kHz (Class III)
Surge Immunity Test
EN60255-22-5: 2002;
EN 61000-4-5: 2006, Level 3
b Time to half-value: 1.2/50 μs,
b Amplitude:
2 kV between all groups and case earth,
1 kV between terminals of each group
b Test field strength, frequency band:
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
EN 60255-22-3: 2008, Class III:
Radiated Immunity from Digital Radio Telephones
EN 60255-22-3:2008
10 V/m, 900 MHz 100% AM, 200 Hz/50% square
wave
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio
Frequency Fields
EN 61000-4-6: 2009, Level 3
Disturbing test voltage: 10 V, 150 Hz to 80 MHz,
80% AM, 1 kHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
EN 61000-4-8: 2010, Level 4
b 30 A/m applied continuously,
b 300 A/m applied for 3 s
Conducted Emissions
EN 55022: 2010
b 0.15 - 0.5 MHz, 79 dBμV (quasi peak) 66 dBμV
(average);
b 0.5 - 30 MHz, 73 dBμV (quasi peak) 60 dBμV
(average)
Radiated Emissions
EN 55022: 2010
b 30 - 230 MHz, 40 dBμV/m at 10 m
measurement distance;
b 230 - 1 GHz, 47 dBμV/m at 10 m measurement
distance
28
80 MHz to 1000 MHz: 10 V/m,
1.4 GHz to 2.7 GHz: 10 V/m
b Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80% sinus
NRJED112402EN
Environmental characteristics
MiCOM series 10
(cont.)
EMC Tests
Standard
Value
Ambient Temperature Range
EN 60255-1: 2010
b Operating temperature range:
-20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F),
b Temporarily permissible temperature:
–40°C to +85°C (–40°F to +185°F)
with double errors
b Storage and transit:
–25°C to +70°C (–13°F to +158°F)
Ambient Humidity Range
EN 60068-2-78: 2001
56 days at 93% relative humidity and +40°C.
EN 60068-2-30: 2005
Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12) hour cycles, 93%
RH, +25 to +55°C
Vibration Test
EN 60255-21-1: 1995
b Response Class 1
b Endurance Class 1
Shock and Bump
EN 60255-21-2: 1995
b Shock response Class 1
b Shock withstand Class 1
b Bump Class 1
Seismic
EN 60255-21-3:1995
Class 2
Enclosure Protection
EN 60529: 1991
b IP 40 Protection for relay housing
b IP 20 Protection for terminals.
b IP 54 Protection (front panel) against dust and
2
dripping water for flash mounted case.
Standard
Compliance with the European Commission's EMC Directive
Product Safety
NRJED112402EN
DM101167EN
DM101167EN
EMC Directives
EMC Compliance
2004/106/EC
Product Specific Standards were used to establish conformity:
b EN 60255-26: 2009
b EN 60255-1: 2010
Compliance with the European Commission's Low Voltage Directive.
2006/95/EC
Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards :
b EN60255-27:2005
29
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P111
Numerical three phase and earth fault
overcurrent relay description
PC151012b
MiCOM P111 relays provide features for easy adaptation to different applications
and operation conditions.
The P111 can be fully configured manually, without using setting software.
Alternatively, MiCOM S1 Studio setting software allows configuration parameters to
be modified for a specific application via the USB port.
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU integrated communication protocols are
available for flexible integration into most substation control or DCS systems.
Close and Trip commands can be executed via functional key on the front panel,
default menu window, DCS/SCADA system (RS485) or configured binary input.
Three level password gives proper rights for secure maintenance of the relay.
2
As a device housed in a small sized flush-mountable case, the P111 can be easily
installed in all modern, dimension-focused switchgear panels.
The relay can be also considered as a cost-effective answer to retrofit demands of
older substations.
Selectable measuring criteria: True RMS and/or fundamental frequency (Fourier)
current measurements allow to increase selectivity and adapt to the application.
The MiCOM P111 relays are suitable for all the
applications where overcurrent and/or
earth-fault protection are required.
P111 can be applied to medium and low
voltage electrical systems as an optimized
and cost efficient solution tailored to user’s
needs.
Customer benefits
b Flexible current relay
b Full set of measurement
b Good feature/price ratio
b Settings made easy
b Effortless installation
Application
The MiCOM P111 numerical overcurrent protection relays provide an optimized and
cost efficient solution.
Typical applications are:
b Utility and industrial substation fitted with cost-optimized MV switchboards
b Retrofit relays of old technology, particularly during installation of DCS systems
b Transformers, incomers, bus couplers, capacitor banks, overhead lines and
underground cables on MV systems
b Neutral system protection (insulated, solid and resistance earthed)
b LV substations
Main features
The following functions are generally available in all devices:
b Operate in 1, 2, or 3-phase arrangement.
b Two setting groups, selected from the relay menu, binary input or SCADA/DCS.
b Flush mounted case.
b Fundamental (fn) and True RMS (within a frequency range from 10Hz to 1kHz)
phase current value measurement.
b Earth current fundamental (fn) frequency measurement.
b 9 button keypad to input settings, configure the relay and close and trip command
and display (2x16 LCD).
b Fault record for most recent trips.
The P111 protection relays are comprised of full suite of protection functions as well
as auxiliaries. Each function can be individually configured or disabled to suit every
kind of application.
All available functions, including protection, automation, communication, LEDs,
inputs and outputs, are easily programmable through the user-friendly human
machine interface and/or the MiCOM S1 STUDIO software interface.
The 32 alphanumerical LCD provides the user with key information (faults,
measurements, settings, etc). The menus have a pull-down structure for easy use
and quick access to any data. User can switch HMI language directly through the
front panel.
8 LEDs indicate the correct operation of the relay as well as other information
regarding the protection of the electrical system.
The hardware architecture and software algorithms have been designed to operate
on very short failure detection times. Tripping occurs typically within no more than 40 ms.
30
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P111
Ratings
Power supply
Power Supply Nominal Burden Auxiliary Power Supply Vx
Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx
(ordering options)
Operating range
Tolerable AC ripple
b 24 – 60 Vdc/ 24 – 60 Vac (50/60Hz) (Models B, A, and E)
b 90 – 250 Vdc/ 90 – 240 Vac (50/60 Hz) (Model B, A and E)
b 24 – 250 Vdc/ 24 – 240 Vac (50/60 Hz) (Models L and N)
b 19 – 72 V (dc), 19 – 66 V (ac) (Models B, A, and E)
b 71 – 300 V (dc), 71 – 265 V (ac) (Model B, A and E)
b 19 – 300 Vdc/ 19 – 265 Vac (50/60 Hz) (Models L and N )
2
Up to 12% for a dc supply, per IEC 60255-11: 2008
Nominal Burden Auxiliary Power Supply Vx
For AC max. approx.
Vx - V
24 – 60 Vac
90 – 240 Vac (L, N : 24 -240Vac)
S - VA
Initial position *
Active position **
24
2.5
4.5
48
3.0
5.5
110
4.0
6.5
220 / 230
6.0
9.0
264
7.0
10.0
For DC Vx voltage max. approx.
S-W
Initial position *
Active position **
24 – 60 Vdc
1.5
3.5
90 – 240 Vdc
2.0
3.5
(*) Initial position: no output nor LED energized
(**) Active position: all outputs and LEDs energized
Auxiliary Power Supply Voltage Interruption
IEC 60255-11: 2008
Within the auxiliary supply range:
b 90-250Vdc, the relay will withstand a 50 ms;
b 24-48Vdc, the relay will withstand a 20 ms
Interruption of the DC auxiliary supply without de-energizing.
EN 61000-4-11: 1997
Within the auxiliary supply range:
b 90-250Vac, the relay will withstand a 50 ms;
b 24-48Vac, the relay will withstand a 20 ms
Interruption of the AC auxiliary supply without de-energizing.
Power-up Time for Auxiliary Supply Voltage only
Time to power up via auxiliary supply: < 0.5s
NRJED112402EN
31
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Ratings
(cont.)
Frequency and Current inputs
Frequency (Current inputs)
Nominal frequency
50 or 60 Hz (selectable in P111 menu)
Phase current inputs
2
Nominal current (In)
1 or 5 A (selectable via HMI)
RMS measurement in range
40 Hz – 1 kHz
Fundamental harmonic measurement in range
40 Hz – 70 Hz
Operating range
0.1 – 40 In
b < 0.3 VA at In=5A
b < 0.1 VA at In=1A
b 1 s @ 100 x rated current
b 2 s @ 40 x rated current
b 10 s @ 30 x rated current
b continuous: 4 x rated current
Nominal Burden at In
Thermal withstand
Earth current inputs
Nominal current (Ien):
1 or 5 A (selectable via HMI)
Fundamental harmonic measurement in range
40 Hz – 70 Hz
Operating range
Selected at order (Cortec)
b 0.01 – 2Ion
b 0.05 – 12Ion
b 0.01-12Ion (hardware option available in Model E)
Nominal Burden at Ion
< 0.3 VA at In=5A; < 0.1 VA at In=1A
Thermal withstand
b 1 s @ 100 x rated current
b 2 s @ 40 x rated current
b 10 s @ 30 x rated current
b continuous @ 4 x rated current
Ion: earth fault input nominal current (Ien)
Binary inputs (optically isolated inputs)
Ordering Code of
Vx
Filtering time
approx.
Nominal Voltage
range
Voltage operating
range
Minimum
polarisation
voltage (Logic 1)
approx.
Maximum
polarisation
current
approx.
1
20 ms
24 – 60 Vac/dc
19.2 – 66 Vac / dc
b 16 Vdc
b 18 Vac
12 mA (66V)
2
20ms
90 – 240 Vac/dc
71 – 264 Vac / dc
66 Vac/dc
2.5 mA (264V)
Maximum
continuous
withstand
b 110 Vdc
b 78 Vac
b 300 Vdc
b 264 Vac
Binary input energy consumption
Logic input burden for Vx ordering code 0
R input = approx. 6 kOhm
Logic input burden for Vx ordering code 1
R input = approx. 109 kOhm
Logic input recognition time
As filtering time + 2 ms
32
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P111
Ratings
(cont.)
Output Relay Characteristics
Contact ratings
Contact relay
Dry contact, Ag Ni
Carry capability
5 A continuous
Rated Voltage
250 Vac
Breaking characteristics for RL1, RL3 and WD
Short-duration capacity
25 A for 3 s
Making capacity
150 A for 30 ms
AC breaking capacity
DC breaking capacity
Operation time
2
b 1250 VA resistive (cos = unity)
b 1250 VA inductive (cos = 0.7)
b 250 Vdc
b 50 W resistive
b 25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
<10 ms
Durability
Loaded contact
10 000 operations minimum
Unloaded contact
100 000 operations minimum
Breaking characteristics for RL4 RL5, RL6, RL7, RL8
Short-duration capacity
25 A for 3 s
Making capacity
150 A for 30 ms
AC breaking capacity
DC breaking capacity
Operation time
b 1250 VA resistive (cos = unity)
b 1250 VA inductive (cos = 0.7)
b 250 Vdc
b 50 W resistive
b 25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
< 10 ms
Durability
Loaded contact
10 000 operations minimum
Unloaded contact
100 000 operations minimum
NRJED112402EN
33
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Protection functions
Functional overview
DM101164EN
(Description of ANSI code nos., see Protection Functions Table)
USB port
Rear port
Setting
Software S1
RS485 port
SCADA system
RECORDING FEATURES
86
LEDs
8
Fault recording
20
Event Recording
200
Flexible Disturbance
Recording
2
I/O FEATURES
Binary inputs
8
Contact outputs
6
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
MEASUREMENTS
b SOTF (Switch on to fault)
b Phase current
b CB local/Remote
b Residual current
b Remote ctrl on output relays
b Trip, start, alarm counters
b Auxiliary timers
b Autoreclose counters
b Self Diagnostic
b Two setting groups
79
I
50/51
50N
51N
49
50BF
46
46BC
Numerical three phase and earth fault
overcurrent relay MiCOM P111 model E
ANSI
Functions
Code
49
50BF
L
Thermal overload (true RMS): 2 independent thresholds (Alarm, Trip)
Models
N
B
A
E
b
b
b
b
Circuit breaker failure
b
b
b
b
b
Three-phase non directional overcurrent: 3 independent thresholds (12 groups of IDMT curves)
b
b
b
b
b
b
Switch on to fault (SOTF)
50/51
Inrush blocking
b
Blocking logic
b
b
b
b
b
50N/51N
46
Cold Load Pick-Up
b
b
b
b
Phase-earth non directional overcurrent: 2 independent thresholds (12 groups of IDMT curves)
b
b
b
b
b
b
Negative phase sequence overcurrent
b
Broken conductor detection (I2/I1)
b
79
Autorecloser (4 shots)
b
86
Output relay latching
b
b
b
b
b
2 setting groups
b
b
b
b
b
Self-monitoring feature with watchdog contact WD
1
1
1
1
1
0/4
0/6
4/4
4/8
8/6
b
b
b
46BC
Freely configurable binary inputs / output relays (watchdog contact WD included)
8 signalling LEDs (“Healthy” + “Trip” + “Alarm” + 5 freely configurable LEDs)
Circuit breaker supervision and counters
Trip circuit supervision
Fault records for the 20 most recent trips
b
Event records (up to 200 events)
b
b
b
b
Disturbance records (up to 5 s)
LCD display
b
Rear port RS485 communications (Modbus RTU and IEC60870-5-103)
Measurements
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
back-lit
back-lit
back-lit
b
b
b
b
Option
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Front USB port for local downloading of settings, events and/or fault records
CB control: HMI, via binary input or RS485
b
b
b
b
Optional cassette (adaptor) for wall-mounted solution
b
b
b
b
b
Optional front cover preventing from unauthorized access
b
b
b
b
b
Setting software: MiCOM S1 and/or S1 Studio
34
b
b
Selective relay scheme logic
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Protection functions
(cont.)
Thermal Overload (49)
EM1000044EN
The protection of transformers and cables must take into account their particular
thermal characteristics.
MiCOM P111 relays include a thermal replica element based on the true RMS value
of the current, up to the 10th harmonic. Alarm and Trip overload thresholds and
time constant are fully programmable to match each application requirement.
Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF)
The circuit breaker failure protection function verifies the effective opening of the
CB using a dedicated undercurrent threshold.
2
The circuit breaker failure function can be activated by the trip of an internal
protection function and/or an external command through the relevant digital input.
The circuit breaker failure protection function can also be used to trip upstream
circuit breakers.
Three-Phase Overcurrent (50/51) & Earth Fault Overcurrent
(50N/51N)
Three independent stages are available both for phase and earth fault protection.
For the first and second (50/51 only) stages the user may independently select a
definite time delay (DMT) or an inverse time delay (IDMT) with different types of
curves (IEC, IEEE, RI, RECT, RXIDG, BNP EDF).
Each stage and related time-delay can be programmed to provide maximum
selectivity.
The IDMT stages have a selectable reset feature: DMT (0 to 600 s) or an IDMT
timer so as to reduce clearance times when intermittent faults occur.
The MiCOM P111 relays have separate instantaneous and delayed indications for
each stage and output relays and LEDs can be configured to indicate the faulted
phase(s).
DM101165EN
Each protection stage can be disabled, configured to trip a circuit-breaker or to
issue an ALARM signal only.
Switch-on-to-Fault (based on 50/51)
Time
I th
The closing of a circuit breaker might inadvertently lead to a short-circuit fault due
to a maintenance ground clamp not yet removed. The P111 relays incorporate a
settable switch-on–to-fault protection function. It provides an instantaneous trip
over a settable time period after local or remote manual closure.
I>
t>
Inrush current in transformer applications can have an influence on the selectivity
of instantaneous trips; the short time-delay (DMT) can therefore be set for this
protection element in order to maintain selectivity and make it possible to have a
current threshold below any inrush current peak.
I>>
I<
t>>
I>>>
t>>>
One independent DMT current stage is available for phase fault protection.
Inrush Blocking
Current
The 2nd Harmonic Blocking detects high inrush current inflows that occur upon
connection of transformers or rotating machines. The function will block the phase
overcurrent and earth fault elements (freely selectable).
Blocking Logic
When MiCOM P111 relays are used in critical networks, the management of
protection relays must take surrounding devices into consideration. Any blocking
digital inputs can be independently configured to lock any combination of selected
elements (i.e. current stages, thermal replica, etc).
A typical application is to use a dedicated digital input to block the time-delayed
settings of phase/earth fault protection in a relay in response to the phase/earth
fault start condition of a downstream relay.
This function allows the MiCOM relays to clear the fault quickly and correctly when
used in a cascading scheme.
.
NRJED112402EN
35
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P111
Protection functions
(cont.)
Selective Relay Scheme Logic
The MiCOM P111 relays (Model E) include selective relay scheme logic. A
dedicated digital input can temporarily alter the time delay settings in response to
the phase/earth fault start condition of a downstream relay. This function allows the
MiCOM relays to quickly clear the fault when used in a cascade scheme.
Cold Load Pick-Up
Cold load pick-up temporarily raises the setting of selectable stages closer to the
lad profile in order to avoid unwanted trips.
2
The setting value can be increased by 800% for example for a settable duration.
To trigger this function, the CB closed position or current criteria are used.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46)
The MiCOM P111 relays (model E) include a programmable function specially
designed to detect unbalanced load or fault conditions.
The three stages of negative sequence overcurrent have the same setting ranges
and time delay as the phase overcurrent.
Broken Conductor (46BC)
A typical unbalanced fault that can occur on the system is an open circuit fault. This
fault can arise from broken conductor, discrepancy of one switchgear poles position
or blowing of a fuse.
MiCOM P111 relays (Model E) are able to measure the ratio of negative to positive
sequence current (I2/I1). This fully programmable function allows more sensitivity
and stability than pure negative sequence measurement
Autorecloser (79)
EM1000045EN
MiCOM P111 relays (Model E) include a 4-shot triphase autorecloser. All the
programmed protection functions may independently start any of the shots and the
user can program which functions are allowed to trip after any of the shots. This
makes possible special reclosing cycles e.g. as requested for coordination with
fuses in distribution with tapped transformers.
To prevent excessive number of reclosing cycle in a short period of time, a setting
can be used to define the maximum number of reclosing cycle allowed in a period
of time after first one was detected. Dead and reclaim times are freely adjustable.
A counter stores the number of reclose commands. This information is free locally
or remotely. To inform operator that autorecloser has been blocked internally or
externaly, output relays can be assigned to theses signals.
Output Relay Latching (86)
All output contacts may be latched freely.
Latched outputs can be reset via the activation of a logic input through the front
panel interface or by remote communication.
Instantaneous Information
Outputs and LEDs can be programmed with instantaneous information from freely
selectable protection elements: with or without latching.
Additionally, every start of a protection element is recorded in the event recorder
and the instantaneous recorder.
The instantaneous information is typically generated within 30 ms after the
threshold has been exceeded.
Trip Via Binary Input
Opto-isolated binary inputs are freely configured to timers AUX1-AUX4.
This function works if inputs are triggered via the auxiliary voltage.
36
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P111
Control & Monitoring
Communication & Synchronization
The MiCOM P111 offers a wide range of communication protocols allowing its
utilization in most network control and data acquisition systems (via Modbus, IEC
60870-5-103). The protocol can be selected in the P111 mIt has been designed for
permanent multi-drop connection through the rear RS485 communication port.
The MiCOM P111 incorporates an internal clock to allow 1 ms accuracy time
tagging of alarms, events, fault and disturbance records. To avoid any drifting of the
time-tagging clock, it’s necessary to periodically synchronize the relays. To do this
the P111 offers a solution:
b Synchronization from the substation control sysThe back-up capacitor of the
internal clock is charged from an auxiliary voltage supply and supports the internal
clock typically up to t
2
Two Setting Groups
External conditions may require the need for different settings or I/O configuration.
The MiCOM P111 provides two independent setting groups. The active setting
group can be switched from the local HMI or due to external conditions (digital input
change of state or DCS control).
The two setting groups include protection settings, binary input, output and LED
configuration.
Local/Remote Mode of CB Commands
The goal of this feature is to make it possible to block commands sent remotely
through communication networks (such as setting parameters, control commands,
etc.) in order to prevent any accidents or maloperation during maintenance work
performed on site.
The local mode can be set via a digital input assigned to this feature or an RS485.
The local mode state can be indicated via the configured LED.
Circuit Breaker/Contactor Command
Circuit breaker control is available from the front panel user interface, opticallyisolated inputs and remotely via substation communications. Circuit breaker control
is also possible via the function keys (Close/Open).
For contactor application the output contact has to be configured with reverse
logic&latching.
It is possible to send a local open/close command through the HMI upon operator
confirmation.
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
The circuit breaker condition monitoring features include:
b Monitoring the number of breaker trip operations
b Recording the sum of the broken current quantity
, (where x: 1 or 2)
b Monitoring the breaker operating time
An alarm signal is emitted if the above parameters exceed the settable threshold.
Timers AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4
Timers operate if the state of an input mapped to this function changes in such a
way that the function will be triggered. Timers can be used for CB tripping or alarm
signalling.
This function is available when inputs are energised via an auxiliary power supply.
To upload them, it is possible to use the front USB port (MiCOM S1 Studio) or the
rear serial port (DCS). Event records are stored in a non volatile FRAM memory. All
events are time-stamped to 1 ms.
Fault & Alarm Recording
The last 20 faults and 5 alarms records are stored inside the MiCOM P111 relays.
Each fault includes: Record number/ Fault time / Active setting group / Faulted phase
/ Protection operation / Magnitude of input quantities.
Fault indication helps the user to clearly identify the fault and monitor the relay’s
settings and operations as all information is available on the relay HMI.
Fault records are stored in a non-volatile FRAM memory.
NRJED112402EN
37
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P111
Control & Monitoring
(cont.)
Event Recording
200 events are stored in the MiCOM P111 relays. Events include input/output state
changes, alarms and contact operations.
Disturbance Recording
EM1000047EN
WaveWin – Data Analyzer Software
The disturbance recording function is triggered either by any of the programmed
thresholds, by an external input, or through the communications. All digital and
analog information is stored in non-volatile FRAM memory and can be transferred
using the front communication port or the rear port to be used by an external data
analyser. Disturbance records are stored in a non-volatile FRAM memory.
Trip Supervision
Trip circuit supervision in both circuit breaker open and closed states is possible
using the optically isolated-inputs included in the P111 scheme logic.
I/O Configuration
Every input and output can be freely configured to available functions (blocking of
protection element, reset LED or outputs, start, trip of every protection element,
etc). Any input and output can be assigned to any predefined function.
Relay Maintenance Mode
The P111 incorporates direct control of the output relays (without the need to inject
any current). This functionality allows the user to quickly check the external wiring
of the relay’s output contacts.
Support Software
MiCOM S1 Studio and MiCOM S1 (WindowsTM compatible) support software is
available for the entire MiCOM family, including the P111 relays.
This Support Software is used to set all parameters in the P111 or download setting
parameters, fault and event records. Communication with a PC is managed by the
front USB port of the P111.
Self-Monitoring
Comprehensive self-monitoring procedures within the P111 ensure that internal
hardware or software errors are detected and do not cause malfunctions of the
device. When the auxiliary voltage is turned on, a functional test is carried out.
Cyclic self-monitoring tests are run during operation. Any deviations are stored in
non-volatile memory and determines whether protection is blocked or an alarm is
raised. The result of the fault diagnostics determines whether the protection unit will
be blocked or only an alarm will emitted.
EM1000046EN
2
Up to 5 disturbance files are stored in the relay. Even if the total duration is set to 4
s, it is fully adjustable for easy adaptation to customer requirements. They are
stored in COMTRADE format.
38
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
Protection functions setting ranges
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
[49] Thermal overload (Models N, B, A and E)
Therm. OL ?
Disabled, Enabled
Itherm
0.1 In
3.0 In
0.01In
Te (heating)
1 mn
200 mn
1mn
Tr (cooling)
1 mn
999 mn
1mn
Theta Trip
50%
200%
1%
Theta Reset Ratio
20%
99%
1%
Theta Alarm ?
Disabled, Enabled
Theta Alarm
20%
200%
1%
2
[50/51] Phase overcurrent
I> ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A, E),Trip Latch (A, E)
I>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG,
BPN EDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve)
tI>
0.05 s
200 s
0.01 s
I> TMS
0.02
1.50
0.01
I> TD
0.02
100
0.01
I> Reset Delay Type
4 In (IDMT) 40 In (DMT)
0.01 In
DT or IDMT
DT I> tReset
0.00 s
600 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1
10
0.1
I>> ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A, E),Trip Latch (A, E)
I>>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG,
BPN EDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve)
tI>>
0.05 s
200 s
0.01 s
I>> TMS
0.02
1.50
0.01
I>> TD
0.02
100
0.01
I>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
DT I>> tReset
0.00 s
600 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1
10
0.01
I>>> ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A, E),Trip Latch (A, E)
I>>>
1 In
40 In
0.01 In
tI>>>
0s
200 s
0.01 s
4 In (IDMT) 40 In (DMT)
0.01 In
[50/51] SOTF (switch on to fault) (Model B, A and E)
SOTF ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip Latch
SOTF
1 In
40 In
0.01 In
tSOTF
0s
600 s
0.01 s
[50/51N] Phase-earth non directional overcurrent
High sensitivity current set
Cortec code P111xxx0xxxxxxxxxx (0.01-2Ien)
IN_1 (IN>)
0.01 Ien
0.2 Ien (IDMT) 2.0 Ien (DMT)
0.01 Ien
IN_2 (IN>>)
0.05 Ien
2.0 Ien
0.01 Ien
IN_3 (IN>>>) (Model E)
0.05 Ien
2.0 Ien
0.01 Ien
Low sensitivity current set
Cortec code P111xxx3xxxxxxxxxx (0.05-12Ien)
IN_1 (IN>1)
0.05 Ien
1.2 Ien (IDMT)12 Ien (DMT)
0.01 Ien
IN_2 (IN>>)
0.3 Ien
12 Ien
0.01 Ien
IN_3 (IN>>>) (Model E)
0.3 Ien
12 Ien
0.01 Ien
Extended current set (Model E only)
Cortec code P111xxx4xxxxxxxxxx (0.01-12Ien)
IN_1 (IN>1)
0.01 Ien
1.2 Ien (IDMT)12 Ien (DMT)
0.01 Ien
IN_2 (IN>>)
0.3 Ien
12 Ien
0.01 Ien
IN_3 (IN>>>)
0.3 Ien
12 Ien
0.01 Ien
NRJED112402EN
39
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
[50/51N] Phase-earth non directional overcurrent (cont.)
2
IN_1 (IN>) stage?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A, E),Trip Latch (A, E)
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG,
BPN EDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve)
tIN_1 (tIN>)
0.05 s
200 s
0.01 s
IN_1 (IN>) TMS
0.02
1.50
0.01
IN_1 (IN>) TD
0.02
100
0.01
IN_1 (IN>) Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
DT IN_1 (IN>) tReset
0.00 s
600 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1
10
0.1
IN_2 (IN>>) stage?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A, E),Trip Latch (A, E)
tIN_2 (tIN>>)
0s
IN_3 (IN>>) stage? (Model E)
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A, E),Trip Latch (A, E)
tIN_3 (tIN>>) (Model E)
0s
200 s
0.01 s
200 s
0.01 s
Blocking Inrush (Model A and E)
Blocking inrush
No, Yes, Closing
2nd Harmonic Ratio
10%
50%
1%
Inrush Reset Time
0s
200 s
10 ms
Unblock Inrush Time
0s
200 s
10 ms
Auxiliary timers (Model B, A and E)
Aux1 ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A,E), Load Shedding LS (E),
AR after LS via Hi Input state (E), AR after LS via Lo Input state (E)
Time-delay tAux1
0
Aux2 ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A,E), Load Shedding LS (E), AR after LS via Hi state of Input (E),
AR after LS via Lo state of Input (E)
Time-delay tAux2
0
Aux3 ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A,E), Load Shedding LS (E), AR after LS via Hi Input state (E),
AR after LS via Lo Input state (E)
Time-delay tAux3
0
Aux4 ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A,E), Load Shedding LS (E), AR after LS via Hi Input state (E),
AR after LS via Lo Input state (E)
Time-delay tAux4
0
600 s
600 s
600 s
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
600 s
10 ms
Cold Load PU
Cold Load PU ?
Disabled or Current+Input or Input (A, E)
Cold load PU Level
20%
999%
1%
Cold load PU tCL
0s
6000 s
100 ms
CLPU I>
Yes or No
CLPU I>>
Yes or No
CLPU I>>>
Yes or No
CLPU IN_1 (IN>)
Yes or No
CLPU IN_2 (IN>>)
Yes or No
CLPU Itherm (NA)
Yes or No
[46] Negative Sequence Overcurrent
I2> ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A, E),Trip Latch (A, E)
I2>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG,
BPN EDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve)
tI2>
0.05 s
200 s
0.01 s
I2> TMS
0.02
1.50
0.01
I2> TD
0.02
100
0.01
IN_2 (IN>) Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
DT I2> tReset
0.00 s
600 s
0.01 s
40
4 In
0.01 In
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
[46BC] Broken Conductor (Model A and E)
I2> ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking (A, E),Trip Latch (A, E)
Ratio I2/I1
20%
100%
1%
tBCond>
0.05 s
200 s
0.01 s
Brkn. Cond I< Block
0.1 In
1 In
0.01 In
2
[50BF] Circuit breaker failure
CB Fail ?
Disabled, Retrip, Alarm
CB Fail Time tBF
0.1 s
10 s
0.01 s
I< CBF
0.1 In
2 In
0.01 In
0.1 Ien
2 Ien
0.01 Ien
0.1 Ien
2 Ien
0.01 Ien
2 Ien
0.01 Ien
High sensitivity current setting
P111xxx0xxxxxxxxxx (0.01-2Ien)
IN< CBF
Low sensitivity current setting
P111xxx3xxxxxxxxxx (0.05-12Ien)
IN< CBF
Extended current set (Model E only)
Cortec code P111xxx4xxxxxxxxxx (0.01-12Ien)
IN<CBF
0.1 Ien
[79] Autoreclose (Model E)
Autoreclose ?
Disabled or Enabled
Dead time tD1
0.01s
600s
0.01s
Dead time tD2
0.01s
600s
0.01s
Dead time tD3
0.01s
600s
0.01s
Dead time tD4
0.01s
600s
0.01s
Reclaim Time tR
0.02s
600s
0.01s
Fast O/C Trip (I>, I>>, I>>>)
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Fast O/C Trip Delay setting
0.00s
9.99s
0.01s
Fast E/GND Trip
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Fast E/GND Trip Delay setting
0.00s
9.99s
0.01s
Close Shot tI>
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Close Shot tI>>
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Close Shot tI>>>
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Close Shot tIN_1 (IN>)
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Close Shot tIN_2 (IN>>)
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Close Shot tIN_3 (IN>>>)
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Close Shot tAUX1
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Close Shot tAUX2
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Inhibit Trip tI>
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Inhibit Trip tI>>
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Inhibit Trip tI>>>
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Inhibit Trip tIN_1 (IN>)
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Inhibit Trip tIN_2 (IN>>)
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Inhibit Trip tIN_3 (IN>>>)
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Inhibit Trip tAUX1
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Inhibit Trip tAUX2
Enabled or Disabled for every cycle
Ext. CB Faulty Monitoring ?
Yes or No
Ext. Block via Input?
Yes or No
Start Dead Time on
Protection Reset or CB trips
Rolling Demand ?
Yes or No
Max. cycle number Roll. Dem.
2
100
1
Time period Rolling Demand
1 mn
24 h
1 mn
Time Inhibit on Close tI
0.0 s
600 s
0.01 s
Signalling Reset
No or on Close [79]
NRJED112402EN
41
MiCOM series 10
Protection functions setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Functions
Min.
Max.
Step
600.0 s
0.01s
600.0 s
0.01s
Logic Selectivity (Model E)
2
SEL1 ?
Disabled or Enabled
tSEL1
0.00 s
SEL1 tI>>
Yes or No
SEL1 tI>>>
Yes or No
SEL1 tIN>>
Yes or No
SEL1 tIN>>>
Yes or No
SEL2 ?
Disabled or Enabled
tSEL2
0.00 s
SEL2 tI>>
Yes or No
SEL2 tI>>>
Yes or No
SEL2 tIN>>
Yes or No
SEL2 tIN>>>
Yes or No
Control & monitoring functions
setting ranges
Setting range
Functions
Min.
Max.
Step
CB Control time
Models
tOpen Pulse min
All models
0.1 s
10 s
0.01 s
tClose Pulse
All models
0.1 s
10 s
0.01 s
Time-delay for Close
Model A
0.0 s
200 s
0.01 s
1s
200 s
1s
200 s
0.01 s
10 s
0.01 s
Time-delay for faulty CB external signal (Model B, A and E)
tCB FLT ext
Remote control mode (Model A and E)
b Remote only
b Remote + Local
Remote CTRL Mode
[52] Unblock SOTF Time Pulse after CB Close (Model B, A and E)
52 Unblock SOTF Time
0s
Trip Circuit (TC) Supervision (Model A and E)
TC Supervision ?
b No
b Yes
b Yes / 52A
TC Supervision tSUP
0.1 s
Circuit breaker control and monitoring setting ranges (Model A and E)
CB Time Supervision?
Yes or No
CB Open time
0.01 s
10 s
0.01 s
CB Close time
0.01 s
10 s
0.01 s
CB Diagnostic ?
Yes or No
Max CB Open NB
1
50000
1
0.1 MA^n
6535.5 MA^n
0.1MA^n
Amps(n)
42
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P111
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Recording functions setting ranges
Disturbance records (Model A )
Functions
Value
Triggers
Any protection stage selected to trip CB, logical input , remote command
Data
b AC input channels
b Digital input and output states
b Frequency value
Functions
Default value
Pre-fault Time
0.1
0.1
2
0.01
Post-fault Time
0.1
0.1
1
0.01
Max duration time
3
0.10
4
0.01
Disturb rec Trig
on Inst
b on Trip
b on Inst.
Trigger
b Start signal of protection selected for tripping
b Trip signal of protection selected for tripping
b Logic input (Start Distur.R.)
2
Setting range
Min.
Max.
Step
Event records (not available in model L without RS485)
Capacity
200 events
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Triggers
b
b
b
b
Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Logic input change of state
Setting changes
Self test events
Fault records
Capacity
20 faults
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Triggers
Any selected protection which trip CB
Data
b
b
b
b
b
Fault date
Protection thresholds
Setting Group
AC inputs measurements
Fault measurements
Alarm recorder
Capacity
5 alarm information
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Triggers
Any selected protection which is selected for signaling only (set to Alarm)
Data
Date, hour, origin (any protection alarm)
NRJED112402EN
43
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Base Unit
Presentation
User-Machine Interface (HMI)
PC151007a
All functions, including protection, automation, communication, LEDs, inputs and
outputs, can be programmed and modified using the front panel user interface
(Human Machine Interface).
The LCD informs the user about settings, measurements & faults with a pull-down
menu structure allowing easy and quick access to any data.
Working language
2
The relay display language can be changed in the menu system.
All the texts and messages displayed on HMI are available in:
b English/German/French/Spanish/Russian/Turkish /Regional.
(Polish or Czech can overwrite on "Regional" )
Wiring
External connections are made via screw terminals.
The screw terminals allow connection of threaded wires of up to 2.5 mm or solid
wires of 4 mm of conductor cross section, with the exception of current terminals
that have up to 4mm for threaded wires and 6mm for solid wires.
Communication
Type port
Physical link
Connectors
Data rate
Comms. mode
Protocol
RS485
Screened twisted
pair
Screws or snap-on
4.8 or 9.6 or 19.2
or 38.4
(default:19.2 kbit/s)
b Data Bit: 8
b Stop bit: 1/ 2
b Parity:
None/Odd/Even
b Address: 1 to 254
b Modbus RTU,
b IEC60870-5-103
(selectable in menu)
USB
USB2.0
PC: type A male
115.2 kbits/s (fixed)
b
b
b
b
P111: type mini B
male
44
Data Bit:8
Stop bit: 1
Parity: None
Address: 1
b Modbus RTU
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P111
Base Unit
(cont.)
Case
All the models of P111 have a flush mounting plastic
case:
DM101136EN
Dimensions & weight
Dimensions
b Height
2
106.5 mm
b Width
106.5 mm
b Depth
118 mm
Weight
b P111
approx.0.5 Kg
Wall mounting solution is possible by using the wall
mounting adapter (accessories).
All dimensions in mm
Cut-out
NRJED112402EN
45
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P111
Base Unit
(cont.)
Front panel description
Green "Healthy" LED : Watchdog
2
Red "Trip" LED : Protection trip
3
Yellow "Alarm" LED : Alarm signalling
3
4
6
Red programmable LED
7
9
4
5
8
9
11
Alphanumeric liquid crystal display:
16 character by 2 line
10 CLEAR key
11 READ key
6
14
7
8
15
12 An ENTER key, 4 ARROW keys
14 CB CLOSE key
15 CB OPEN key
1
16 USB port for local connection
16
12
Rear panel description
1
2
3
46
Terminal block A:
b Auxiliary voltage Vaux
b Contact outputs: WD, RL1-RL3
b Binary inputs: L1, L2
b RS485
Current ring terminal block B:
b Contact outputs
RL6, RL7 (model A) or RL4, RL5 (model E)
b Binary inputs:
L3, L4 (model A) or L5, L6, L7, L8 (model E)
Terminal block B:
b Current analogue inputs (phases and earth)
b Output contacts RL4, RL5 (models N / A)
b Binary inputs:
L3, L4 (model E)
1
PM103528
2
5
10
2
PC151007a
1
2
3
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Base Unit
(cont.)
S2
S2
P1
Ia
A
S1
DM101158EN
P2
S2
B
S1
C
Ic
P2
A1
B
S1
S2
S2
C
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
Ia
Ib
A1
A2
A5
C5
A6
C6
Output
Contact
RL1
A8
C7
C8
A9
Ic
C9
Output
Contact
RL2
A10
RL2
A11
IN
A12
RL3
P111
Model L
-
C10
C11
C12
Output
Contact
RL3
A13
+
RS485
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A3
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A4
A7
RL1
Ib
Ic
S1
S1
A3
WD/RL0
Ia
A
S1
S2
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A2
P1
S2
S1
A18
Ia
Ib
A4
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A5
A6
A7
RL1
A8
Output
Contact
RL1
A9
Ic
A10
RL2
A11
IN
P111
Model L
RS485
Optional
A19
WD/RL0
A12
RL3
Model L:
Typical connection to 3 Phase CTs
A13
+
RS485
-
A18
A19
Output
Contact
RL2
Output
Contact
RL3
RS485
Optional
Model L:
Typical connection to 3 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
DM101157EN
DM101159EN
Model L external connection diagrams
P2
S2
S2
S2
S1
P1
Ia
A
S1
B
C
Ic
Ib
S1
A1
A2
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A3
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
WD/RL0
Ia
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A5
A6
Ib
A7
RL1
A8
Output
Contact
RL1
A9
Ic
A10
RL2
A11
IN
A12
RL3
P111
Model L
A4
A13
+
RS485
-
A18
A19
Output
Contact
RL2
Output
Contact
RL3
RS485
Optional
Model L:
Typical connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
NRJED112402EN
47
2
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Base Unit
(cont.)
S2
S2
2
S2
Ia
A
S1
DM101161EN
DM101162EN
Model N external connection diagrams
B
S1
C
Ic
Ia
A
B
Ib
C
Ic
Ib
S1
Output
Contact RL4
Output
Contact RL5
C1
C3
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
A4
Ia
Ib
A7
RL1
Ic
RL2
Output
C4
Contact RL5
C5
C6
Output
Contact
RL1
C7
C8
A9
C9
A12
RL3
A13
+
RS485
C3
Output
Contact
RL2
C10
A11
IN
USB
Watchdog
WD/RL0
-
A18
C12
A2
A4
WD/RL0
Ia
Ib
A7
RL1
A9
A10
RL2
USB
Model N:
Typical connection to 3 Phase CTs
Output
Contact
RL2
A11
IN
A12
A13
+
RS485
Output
Contact
RL1
A8
Ic
P111
Model N
RS485
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A5
A6
RL3
A19
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A3
RL5
C11
Output
Contact
RL3
A1
RL4
C2
A8
A10
P111
Model N
Output
Contact RL4
A5
A6
C1
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A3
WD/RL0
C11
C12
A2
RL5
C4
C5
A1
RL4
C2
-
A18
Output
Contact
RL3
RS485
A19
Model N:
Typical
to 3 Connection
Phase CTsto+ 3aPhase
Core CTs
Balance
CTBalance CT
Figure
12: connection
Model N, typical
+ a Core
Figure 11: Model N, typical connection to 3 Phase CTs
DM101160EN
PJ163ENd
Ia
A
B
C
Output
Contact RL4
Output
Contact RL5
C1
C3
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
A4
Ia
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A7
RL1
A9
RL2
Output
Contact
RL2
A11
IN
A12
RL3
A13
+
USB
Output
Contact
RL1
A8
A10
RS485
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A5
A6
Ic
P111
Model N
Ib
A3
WD/RL0
C11
C12
A2
RL5
C4
C5
A1
RL4
C2
Ic
-
A18
Output
Contact
RL3
RS485
A19
Model N:
Typical connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
Figure 13: Model N, typical connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
48
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Base Unit
(cont.)
Model B external connection diagrams
S2
S2
P1
P2
Ia
A
S1
B
S1
C
Ic
Ib
S1
Binary Input
L3
Binary Input
L4
C1
C2
C3
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
A2
WD/RL0
Ia
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
S2
S2
B
S1
S2
A4
C
RL1
C1
Binary Input
L3
C3
Binary Input
L4
Watchdog
WD/RL0
C6
Output
Contact
RL1
C7
C8
A9
Ic
A10
RL2
A11
IN
A12
RL3
P111
Model B
A13
A14
L1
A15
L2
C9
Output
Contact
RL2
C10
C11
C12
Output
Contact
RL3
Ia
Ib
RS485
USB
-
A11
IN
A12
A13
A14
L1
A15
RS485
Model B:
Typical connection to 3 Phase CTs
Output
Contact
RL2
Output
Contact
RL3
Binary Input
L1
Binary Input
L2
A16
+
USB
Output
Contact
RL1
A9
A10
L2
A19
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A5
A8
RL2
RS485
A4
A7
RL1
Ic
P111
Model B
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A6
RL3
Binary Input
L1
Binary Input
L2
A18
2
Ib
A3
WD/RL0
A16
+
A2
L4
C4
C5
A1
L3
C2
A6
A8
Ic
S1
S1
A5
A7
Ia
A
S1
A3
L4
C4
C5
A1
L3
P1
S2
DM101253EN
DM101252EN
P2
S2
-
A18
RS485
A19
Model B:
Typical connection to 3 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
DM101251EN
P2
S2
S2
S2
S1
P1
Ia
A
S1
B
C
Ic
Ib
S1
Binary Input
L3
Binary Input
L4
C1
C3
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
A2
WD/RL0
Ia
Ib
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A5
A7
RL1
A8
Output
Contact
RL1
A9
A10
RL2
A11
IN
A12
RL3
A13
A14
L1
A15
L2
RS485
Output
Contact
RL2
Output
Contact
RL3
Binary Input
L1
Binary Input
L2
A16
+
USB
A4
A6
Ic
P111
Model B
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A3
L4
C4
C5
A1
L3
C2
-
A18
RS485
A19
Model B:
Typical connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
NRJED112402EN
49
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Base Unit
(cont.)
P2
P1
S2
S2
S2
Ia
A
S1
DM101156EN
DM101155EN
Model A external connection diagrams
B
S1
C Ic
P2
2
C1
Output
Contact
RL7
C3
C2
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
A1
RL6
A3
RL7
WD
Output
Contact
RL5
Binary
Input L3
Binary
Input L4
B1
B2
B3
B4
RL1
Ic
B7
Output
Contact
RL2
C10
A16
A17
+
RS485
-
A18
RS485
B1
B2
Output
Contact
RL5
B3
Binary
Input L3
Binary
Input L4
B5
B4
B6
B7
A19
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A3
RL7
A4
WD
A5
Ia
Watchdo
g
WD/RL0
A6
A7
RL1
Ib
A8
A9
Ic
A10
RL2
A12
A13
RL4
A14
L1
A15
L2
Output
Contact
RL3
Binary
Input L1
Binary
Input L2
A16
A17
L3
L4
Output
Contact
RL2
A11
IN
RL5
Output
Contact
RL1
+
RS485
-
A18
A19
RS485
B8
B8
B9
B9
B10
B10
USB
USB
P111 Model A
P111 Model A
Model A:
Typical connection to 3 Phase CTs
Figure 5:
A2
RL3
Output
Contact
RL4
Binary
Input L1
Binary
Input L2
A15
L2
A1
RL6
C11
C12
Output
Contact
RL3
A14
L3
L4
C8
C9
A13
L1
B6
C7
A9
A12
RL4
C4
C5
A11
IN
B5
C3
C2
A8
A10
RL2
RL5
Output
Contact
RL7
Output
Contact
RL1
A7
RL3
Output
Contact
RL4
C1
C6
A6
Ib
Output
Contact
RL6
A5
Ia
C11
C12
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A4
C9
C10
C Ic
S1
S1
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A2
Ia
B
S1
S2
S2
A
S1
S2
Ib
S1
Output
Contact
RL6
P1
S2
Model A:
Typical connection to 3 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
Figure 6:
Model A, typical connection to 3 Phase CTs
Model A, typical Connection to 3 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
PJ169ENd
DM101154EN
PJ170ENd
P2
P1
S2
S2
S2
S1
Ia
A
S1
B
C
Ic
Ib
S1
Output
Contact
RL6
C1
Output
Contact
RL7
C3
C2
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
A1
RL6
A2
A3
RL7
A4
WD
Ia
A6
A7
RL1
Ib
A9
A10
RL2
B1
Output
Contact
RL5
B3
Binary
Input L3
Binary
Input L4
B5
B2
B4
A12
A13
RL4
A14
L1
RL5
L4
B7
A15
L2
Output
Contact
RL3
Binary
Input L1
Binary
Input L2
A16
A17
L3
B6
Output
Contact
RL2
A11
IN
RL3
Output
Contact
RL4
Output
Contact
RL1
A8
Ic
C11
C12
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A5
C9
C10
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
+
RS485
-
A18
RS485
A19
B8
B9
B10
USB
P111 Model A
Model A:
Typical connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
Figure 7:
Model A, typical connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
PJ171ENd
50
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P111
MiCOM series 10
Base Unit
(cont.)
P2
P1
S2
S2
B
S1
S2
Ia
A
S1
DM101156EN
DM101155EN
Model E external connection diagrams
C Ic
P2
C1
Output
Contact
RL7
C3
C2
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
A1
RL6
A3
RL7
WD
Ia
Ic
C11
C12
Output
Contact
RL5
Binary
Input L3
Binary
Input L4
B1
B2
B3
B4
L4
B7
C7
A8
C8
A9
C9
Output
Contact
RL2
C10
Binary
Input L1
Binary
Input L2
A17
+
-
A18
RS485
B1
B2
Output
Contact
RL5
B3
Binary
Input L3
Binary
Input L4
B5
B4
B6
B7
A19
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
2
A3
RL7
A4
WD
A5
Ia
Watchdo
g
WD/RL0
A6
A7
RL1
Ib
A8
A9
Ic
A10
RL2
A12
A13
RL4
A14
L1
A15
L2
Output
Contact
RL3
Binary
Input L1
Binary
Input L2
A16
A17
L3
L4
Output
Contact
RL2
A11
IN
RL5
Output
Contact
RL1
+
RS485
-
A18
A19
RS485
B8
B8
B9
B9
B10
B10
USB
USB
P111 Model E
P111 Model E
Model E:
Typical connection to 3 Phase CTs
Figure 5:
A2
RL3
Output
Contact
RL4
A16
RS485
A1
RL6
C11
C12
Output
Contact
RL3
A15
L3
B6
Output
Contact
RL1
A14
L2
C4
C6
A13
L1
B5
C3
C2
C5
A12
RL4
RL5
Output
Contact
RL7
A11
IN
RL3
Output
Contact
RL4
C1
A6
A10
RL2
Output
Contact
RL6
A5
A7
RL1
Ib
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A4
C9
C10
C Ic
S1
S1
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
A2
Ia
B
S1
S2
S2
A
S1
S2
Ib
S1
Output
Contact
RL6
P1
S2
Model E:
Typical connection to 3 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
Figure 6:
Model A, typical connection to 3 Phase CTs
Model A, typical Connection to 3 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
PJ169ENd
DM101154EN
PJ170ENd
P2
P1
S2
S2
S2
S1
Ia
A
S1
B
C
Ic
Ib
S1
Output
Contact
RL6
C1
Output
Contact
RL7
C3
C2
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
A1
RL6
A2
A3
RL7
A4
WD
Ia
A6
A7
RL1
Ib
A9
A10
RL2
B1
Output
Contact
RL5
B3
Binary
Input L3
Binary
Input L4
B5
B2
B4
A12
A13
RL4
A14
L1
RL5
L4
B7
A15
L2
Output
Contact
RL3
Binary
Input L1
Binary
Input L2
A16
A17
L3
B6
Output
Contact
RL2
A11
IN
RL3
Output
Contact
RL4
Output
Contact
RL1
A8
Ic
C11
C12
Watchdog
WD/RL0
A5
C9
C10
Auxiliary
Voltage
Vx
+
RS485
-
A18
RS485
A19
B8
B9
B10
USB
P111 Model E
Model E:
Typical connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
Figure 7:
Model A, typical connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
PJ171ENd
NRJED112402EN
51
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Numerical CT and auxiliary voltage
powered overcurrent relays description
PM103529
MiCOM P115 are numerical relays designed to offer overcurrent and earth fault
protection without requiring any external auxiliary supply.
They can be applied to medium and high voltage electrical systems as either main or
backup protection.
MiCOM P115 can be ordered in self-powered or in a dual-powered version.
P115 can be fully configured manually, without using of setting software.
MiCOM S1 Studio setting software allows via USB port to customize configuration
parameters to specific application.
The relay offers additional measurement, monitoring and recording function
available via communication port.
2
A capacitance discharge output capable of putting out sufficient power to a low
energy trip coil of circuit breaker of MiTOP.
An external flag indicator FI10 (SE) is used for remote or local indication that a trip
has occurred.
Rear RS485 port allows to control of CB (with close and trip command).
Housed in optional Flush or Wall mounting metal case, it can be easily adapted to
various applications.
Application
MiCOM P115: A part of SCADA system
today or in the future
MiCOM P115 numerical overcurrent protection relays provide optimized and cost
efficient solution where no external auxiliary power supply is available or
guaranteed.
b Typical applications are:
b A cost optimized MV switchboard with small dimensions
b HV back up protection (HV/MV transformers)
b Utility and industrial substations
b Retrofit of old technology relays.
Customer benefits
b No need of guaranteed auxiliary power supply
b Small dimensions of relay
Global functions
b USB port for local communication with self-
powering facilities
The power supply to the electronic circuits of the MiCOM P115 has been optimised
so that it can trigger the circuit breaker of MiTOP with a load current of 0.2 In on at
least one phase.
b Excellent for retrofit of old technology relays
The following functions are generally available:
b FRAM memory: no back-up battery inside
b CT powered
b Ordering option: 1A and 5A with possibility to order different nominal current for
phase and earth fault inputs
b Two types of case (HxWxD): flush (183x160x107) or wall (203x138x95) mounting
b Settings referred to nominal current.
Main functions
The hardware architecture and software algorithms have been studied to operate on
very short failure detection times.
P115 relay is optional equipped with circuit breaker trip output (12-24Vdc, 0.1J CB
coil or MiTOP). A capacitance discharge output capable of putting out sufficient
power to low energy trip CB coil.
Thanks of changeover outputs and self-supplying facility P115 can be used in
tripping current transformer application (current tripping CB coil).
An external Flag Indicator can be connected to independent energy output (24VDC,
0.01J)
Communication via USB (Modbus RTU protocol) and rear RS485 port (Modbus RTU
or IEC 103 protocol) allows to download information about settings, measurements
and inputs, outputs, starting, tripping, LEDs status.
IDMT (IEC, IEEE, US) time characteristics can be with instantaneous, time delayed
or IDMT reset.
52
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P115
MiCOM series 10
Ratings
Power supply
AC Measuring Inputs
Nominal frequency of fundamental harmonic (fn)
50 to 60 Hz
Operating range of fundamental harmonic
40 to 70 Hz
Phase current
Nominal current (In)
1 or 5 A (ordering option)
RMS measurement in range
40 Hz -1 kHz
Nominal burden per phase
b In=1A: < 2.5 VA at In
b In=5A: < 3 VA at In
Thermal withstand
b for 1 s: 100 In
b for 10 s: 30 In
b continuous: 3 In
2
Earth fault current
Nominal current (Ien)
1 or 5 A (ordering option)
RMS measurement in range
40 Hz -70 Hz
Nominal burden
b In=1A: < 2.5 VA at Ien
b In=5A: < 3 VA at Ien
Thermal withstand
b for 1 s: 100 Ien
b for 10 s: 30 Ien
b continuous: 3 Ien
Minimum level of current required for relay powering
Phase current
<0.2In, approx.
b one phase: 0.17 In
b two phases: 0.1 In
b three phases: 0.06 In
Earth fault current
<0.2 Ien, approx. 0.17 Ien
Note: depends on connection to the terminals, the earth fault input supplies P115 (connection: terminals 7 and 9) or does not supply P115 (connection: terminals 8
and 9) (refer to Installation chapter: User's manual P115/EN IN)
Nominal Auxiliary Voltage Vx
b Vx: 24 to 48 Vdc, and 24 to 48 Vac (50/60 Hz)
b Vx: 60 to 250 Vdc, and 60 to 240 Vac (50/60 Hz)
Two ordering options
Power supply
Operating Range
With a tolerable ac ripple of up to 12% for a dc supply, per IEC 60255-11: 1979
Nominal Burden - Auxiliary Power Supply Vx
b 19 to 58 V (dc), 19 to 53V (ac)
b 48 to 300 V (dc), 48 to 265 V (ac)
(Initial position: no output nor LED energized / Active position: all outputs and LEDs energized)
S - VA
Vx
24-48Vac
Maximum (approx.)
60-240Vac
Initial position
Active position
24
3.1
5.5
48
2.4
6.0
48
2.6
5.5
60
2.7
5.2
100/110
3.1
5.7
220/230
5.1
7.4
264
6.1
8.4
24-48Vdc and 60-250Vdc
Power-up Time for Auxiliary Supply Voltage only (not powered by CT)
1.5 W
3.7 W
< 0.04 s
Auxiliary Power Supply Voltage Interruption (without powering by CT)
IEC 60255-11: 1979
The relay will withstand a 50 ms interruption of the DC auxiliary supply within the auxiliary supply range, without de-energizing.
EN 61000-4-11: 1997
The relay will withstand a 50 ms interruption in an AC auxiliary supply, without de-energizing.
NRJED112402EN
53
MiCOM P115
MiCOM series 10
Ratings
(cont.)
Inputs
Binary inputs : The binary inputs can be powered with both DC and AC voltage as binary input control voltage
2
Binary input type
Optically isolated
Rated nominal voltage
the same as Vx
Operating range
the same as Vx
Withstand
300 Vdc or 275 Vac
Nominal pick-up and reset thresholds
Vx=24-48Vac/dc
b Pick-up
b Reset
approx. 12 Vdc
approx. 11 Vdc
Vx=60-240Vac/dc
b Pick-up
b Reset
approx. 21 Vdc
approx. 20 Vdc
Vx=24-48Vac/dc
b Pick-up
b Reset
approx. 16 Vac
approx. 11 Vac
Vx=60-240Vac/dc
b Pick-up
b Reset
approx. 26 Vac
approx. 19 Vac
For DC
For AC
Recognition time
<20 ms
Energy consumption of binary inputs
b 24 to 48 Vac/dc: 5,5
b 60 to 240 Vac/dc: 100
Resistance of binary inputs
For 220Vdc: (220 Vdc) x 100
= 0.484 W
Output contacts
General purpose relay outputs for signaling, tripping and alarming
Rated voltage
250 V
Continuous current
5A
Short-duration current
25 A for 3 s
Making capacity
150 A for 30 ms
DC
Breaking capacity
AC
Response to command
Durability
54
50 W resistive
25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
1250 VA resistive (cos
= unity)
1250 VA inductive (cos
= 0.7)
< 10 ms
Loaded contact
10 000 operations minimum
Unloaded contact
100 000 operations minimum
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P115
MiCOM series 10
Ratings
(cont.)
Measured Data Acquisition
b nominal frequency fn
b total harmonic distortion ≤2 %
Reference Conditions: Sinusoidal signals with
b ambient temperature 20 °C
b nominal auxiliary voltage Vx.
Operating Data
Fault Data
For current up to 3 In (Ien)
For current ≤ 3 In (Ien)
For current > 3 In (Ien)
Phase and earth current
Asymmetry current
Phase and earth current
±3%
±5%
2
±5%
±5%
Protection functions
Operation time
Typical operation time, if the P115 is supplied from Vx or if the current is above 0.2 In (Ien)
≤ 40ms
If the pre-fault current is below 0.2 In (Ien) in all phases and that there is no Vx on the 11 -12 terminals, additional time correction should be applied for the operation time
(measured on the outputs contacts)
The correction time measured on energy outputs is 6ms shorter than that measured on output contacts
Hardware ver. P115746x0xxxxxx (without energy output for low energy tripping coil)
b For all types of fault (1, 2, 3-phases)
≤ 25mA
b 1-phase fault, where the current is below 1.6 In (Ien)
≤ 30mA
Hardware ver. P115746x1xxxxxx (with energy output for low energy tripping coil 24VDC 0.1Ws)
b For faults where the current is ≤ 0.6 In
b For all types of fault where the current is > 0.6 In
b 1-phase fault
Ien: ≤ 60ms
b 2-phase fault
Ien: ≤ 60ms
b 3-phase fault
Ien: ≤ 30ms
b 1, 2, 3-phases
Ien: ≤ 30ms
Note: The tripping time in case of a fault if the pre-fault current is below 0.2 In and there is no auxiliary voltage (Vx) on terminals 11 -12 is the sum of the set time
delay, the operation time and the correction time.
NRJED112402EN
55
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Ratings
(cont.)
Protection accuracy
All data are given for inception of fault from currents above 0.2 In
(Ien) at least in 1 phase or if the P115 is powered from the Vx
auxiliary voltage supply.
If the pre-fault current is below 0.2 In (Ien) in all phases and that
there is no Vx on terminals 11 -12 additional time correction should
be taken into account
2
b nominal frequency fn
Reference Conditions:
Sinusoidal signals with
b total harmonic distortion ≤2 %
b ambient temperature 20 °C
b nominal auxiliary voltage Vx.
Three-Phase Overcurrent I>, I>>
Pick-up
temperature range -20°C to +60°C
±5%
temperature range -40°C to +85°C
±7.5%
Drop-off
0.95 x setting ±5%
Minimum IDMT level
1.05 x setting ±5%
IDMT curve
±7.5% or 30 ms whichever is greater
DT operation
±2% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
DT reset
±7.5% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
Three-Phase Overcurrent I>>>
Pick-up
temperature range -20°C to +60°C
±5%
temperature range -40°C to +85°C
±7.5%
Drop-off
0.95 x setting ±5%
DT operation
±2% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
DT reset
±7.5% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
Earth Fault IN>
Pick-up
temperature range -20°C to +60°C
±5%
temperature range -40°C to +85°C
±7.5%
Drop-off
0.95 x setting ±5%
Minimum IDMT level
1.05 x setting ±5%
IDMT curve
±7.5% or 30 ms whichever is greater
DT operation
±2% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
DT reset
±7.5% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
Earth Fault IN>>
Pick-up
temperature range -20°C to +60°C
±5%
temperature range -40°C to +85°C
±7.5%
Drop-off
0.95 x setting ±5%
DT operation
±2% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
DT reset
±10% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
Assymetry overcurrent protection
Measurement criteria based on the maximum deviation of the phase current to the average value of the three-phase current
Pick-up
temperature range -20°C to +60°C
±5%
temperature range -40°C to +85°C
±7.5%
Drop-off
0.95 x setting ±5%
DT operation
±2% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
DT reset
±7.5% or 30 ms, whichever is greater
56
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P115
MiCOM series 10
Protection functions
Functional overview
(Description of ANSI code nos., see Protection Functions Table)
DM101168EN
Remote
Local
Communication Communication
USB
Port
2 x 16
LCD Display
RS485
Port
Low Energy trip Coil
Fault records
5
Event records
100
Communication
2
Flag Indicator
Contact output RL4
Contact output RL3
I>
50/51
I>>
50/51
I>>>
50/51
IE>
50N/51N
IE>>
50N/51N
Iasym>
46
I
Contact output RL2
Contact output RL1
Binary Input L2
Numerical CT and auxiliary
voltage powered overcurrent
relay MiCOM P115
ANSI Code
CBF
50BF
Binary Input L1
Functions
Powering from auxiliary supply voltage (ordering option)
Three-phase overcurrent I>>> (DT)
50/51
Three-phase overcurrent I>> with DT or IDMT (IEC SI, VI, EI, UK LTI, STI, RI, IEEE: MI, VI, EI, US: CO2, CO8)
Three-phase overcurrent I> with DT or IDMT (IEC SI, VI, EI, UK LTI, STI, RI, IEEE: MI, VI, EI, US: CO2, CO8)
50N/51N
Earth fault overcurrent IN>> (DT)
Earth fault overcurrent IN> with DT or IDMT (IEC SI, VI, EI, UK LTI, STI, RI, IEEE: MI, VI, EI, US: CO2, CO8)
Asymmetry overcurrent Iasym> (DT)
Circuit Breaker Failure protection (CBF) with undercurrent criteria
Instantaneous / IDMT delayed reset for IEC, IEEE and US characteristics
Two settings group
Blocking logic and selective relay scheme logic (*)
External Trip or Alarm via Binary Input (timers: AUX1 and AUX2) (*)
Changeover contacts output for current trip coil (RL1 and RL2)
Output for low energy CB coil (12-24Vdc /0.1J) or MiTOP (ordering option)
Output for Flag Indicator (24V, 0.01J)
Up to 4 Binary Contacts (RL1, RL2, RL3, RL4)
8 signalling LEDs (6 freely configured) (*)
86
Output relay latching (*)
Two Binary Opto Isolated Inputs (L1, L2) (*)
Freely I/O configuration
Fault records for the 5 most recent trips
Event records (up to 100 events)
Front USB port for local downloading of settings, events and/or fault records with self supplying facilities
Rear port RS485 communications (Modbus RTU or IEC103) (*)
Measurements (true RMS) available via communication port and LCD display (*)
Setting software MiCOM S1 Studio
(*): Function not available if auxiliary power supply fails
NRJED112402EN
57
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Protection functions
(cont.)
Three-Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51)
MiCOM P115 relays provide three phase current inputs. Three independent stages
are available (I>, I>>, I>>>).
For I> and I>> the user may independently select definite time delay or inverse time
delay with different type of curves IDMT (IEC SI, VI, EI, UK LTI, STI, RI, Rect, IEEE:
MI, VI, EI, US: CO2, CO8).I>>> can be configured with definite time only.
Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection (50N/51N)
MiCOM P115 relays provide two independent stages earth fault current input (IN>
and IN>>).
2
For the first stage (IN>) the user may independently select definite time delay or
inverse time delay with different type of curves IDMT (IEC SI, VI, EI, UK LTI, STI, RI,
Rect, IEEE: MI, VI, EI, US: CO2, CO8).
The second stage (IN>>) can be with definite time only E/f input, depends on the way
of connection (terminals), can supply or not supply P115.
Assymetry Overcurrent Protection
Asymmetry overcurrent stage (DT) is based on difference between phase currents
and average current in three phases.
Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF)
The circuit breaker failure verifies the effective opening of CB by dedicated
undercurrent threshold.
The CBF is used for tripping upstream circuit.
Two Setting Groups
Two setting group includes protection settings, output and LED configuration.
I/O Configuration
Every input and output can be freely configured to available functions (blocking of
protection element, reset LED or outputs, start, trip of every protection element, etc).
Remote Trip via Binary Input
Opto isolated binary input can be freely configured to timers AUX1 or/and AUX2.
Timers can be used for ALARM signalling or TRIP of circuit breaker. This function
works if powering of relay is assured.
Blocking and Selective Scheme Logic
When the P115 relays are used in critical networks, management of protection relays
must take surrounding devices into consideration. Two digital inputs can be
independently configured to lock any combination of selected elements (i.e. current
stages or AUX timers).
Fault and Event Recording
The last 5 faults and 100 logic events are stored in FRAM memory. All events are
time stamped to 1ms.
MiCOM S1 Studio support software
Support Software MiCOM S1 Studio is available for the entire MiCOM family,
including P115 relays. MiCOM S1 Studio is fully WindowsTM compatible.
This Support Software allows to set all parameters in P115 or download settings
parameters, fault and event records.
PC connection with P115 is available via USB port.
58
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Control & Monitoring
The P115 is equipped with integral fault recording facilities suitable for analysis of
complex system disturbances. Fault records can be read out by setting software
MiCOM S1 Studio via the USB port accessible on the P115 front panel. The USB
port offers a communications facility to the P115.
Communications can be established via the USB port even if the P115 is supplied
neither by the CT nor by the auxiliary voltage.
Access to the USB port is protected by means of an elastomer cover.
Event records
The relay records and time tags up to 100 events and stores them in non-volatile
FRAM memory. This enables the system operator to establish the sequence of
events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system condition,
switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest event is
automatically overwritten by the most recent.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag for each event, to a
resolution of 1 ms.
The event records are available for remote viewing, via the communications ports
RS485 or USB.
Relay alarm conditions
Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual
events.
Protection element trips
Any operation of protection elements,(a trip condition) will be logged as an event
record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element and an event value
(this value is intended for use by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1
Studio).
Fault records
Each fault record is generated with time stamp.
The data is recorded for any relevant elements that operated during a fault, and can
be viewed in each of the last 5 fault records:
Measurements
The relay produces a variety of directly measured power system quantities:
b IA, IB, IC - RMS values
b IN - measured fundamental harmonic only (E/F analogue input)
b Iasym - calculated maximal difference between phase current and average value
from 3 phase current
NRJED112402EN
59
2
MiCOM P115
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
Protection functions setting ranges
Setting range
Function
Default
min.
max.
Step
[46] Asymmetry
Disabled
2
Iasym> ?
Disabled, Enable Trip, Enable Alarm
N/A
b Setting for Disable or enable of asymmetry element.
b It is possible to enable for tripping CB (Enable Trip) or enable for an Alarm signal only (Enable Alarm)
b If the protection element is “Enable Trip” configured it means that it is set to the General Trip Command ("Protect. Trip"),
which can be used in I/O configuration
b If the protection element is “Enable Alarm” it means that it is set to the General Alarm Command ("Alarm"), which can be
used in I/O configuration.
Iasym> Threshold
tIasym
0.2 x In
0.08 x In
4 x In
0. 01 x In
200 s
0.01 s
b Pick-up setting for the asymmetry overcurrent element.
10 s
0s
b Setting for the operating time-delay for the asymmetry overcurrent element
[50BF] Circuit breaker failure
CBF ?
CB Fail Time tBF
Disabled
0.2 s
0s
10 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the circuit breaker fail timer stage for which the initiating condition must be valid.
0.1 x In
I< Threshold CBF
Disabled, Enable Trip, Enable Alarm
b Setting to enable or disable the circuit breaker supervision function.
0.05 x In
4 x In
0.01 x In
b Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for overcurrent based protection circuit breaker fail
initiation.
0.1 x Ien
IN< Threshold CBF
0.01 x Ien
2 x Ien
0.01 x Ien
b Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for earth fault current based protection circuit breaker fail
initiation.
b For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.01-2Ien, where Ien: nominal current for e/f input
0.1 x Ien
IN< Threshold CBF
0.05 x Ien
2 x Ien
0.01 x Ien
b Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for earth fault current based protection circuit breaker fail
initiation
b For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.05-10Ien, where Ien: nominal current for e/f input
0.1 x Ien
IN< Threshold CBF
0.05 x Ien
4 x Ien
0.01 x Ien
b Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for earth fault current based protection circuit breaker fail
initiation.
b For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.2-40Ien, where Ien: nominal current for e/f input.
60
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P115
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Function
Default
min.
max.
Step
[50N/51N] Earth/Ground fault
Disabled
IN> ?
Disabled, Enable Trip, Enable Alarm
b Setting for Disable or enable of protection element.
b It is possible to enable for tripping CB (Enable Trip) or enable for an Alarm signal only (Enable Alarm).
b If the protection element is “Enable Trip” configured it means that it is set to the General Trip Command ("Protect. Trip"),
2
which can be used in I/O configuration.
b If the protection element is “Enable Alarm” it means that it is set to the General Alarm Command ("Alarm"), which can be
used in I/O configuration.
0.1 x Ien
IN> Threshold
0.5 x Ien
IN> Threshold
Delay Type IN>
0.2 x Ien
0.01 x Ien
0.05 x Ien
1.0 x Ien
0.01 x Ien
b Pick-up setting for first stage overcurrent element.
b For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.05-10Ien, where Ien: nominal current for e/f input.
1 x Ien
IN> Threshold
0.01 x Ien
b Pick-up setting for first stage e/f overcurrent element.
b For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.01-2Ien, where Ien: nominal current for e/f input.
0.2 x Ien
4.0 x Ien
0.01 x Ien
b Pick-up setting for first stage e/f overcurrent element.
b For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.2-40Ien, where Ien: nominal current for e/f input.
IEC SI
DMT, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, UK STI, UK RC, RI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US
CO2, US CO8
b Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage e/f overcurrent element.
tIN>
IN> TMS
IN> Time Dial
Reset Delay Type IN>
DMT tReset IN>
1s
0.02 s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first e/f stage element.
1s
0.02 s
1.6 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC, UK, and RI IDMT characteristic.
1s
0.02 s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
DMT
DMT or IDMT
b Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves.
0s
0s
200 s
0.01s
b Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
Disabled Disabled, Enable Trip, Enable Alarm
IN>> ?
b Setting for Disable or enable of protection element.
b It is possible to enable for tripping CB (Enable Trip) or enable for an Alarm signal only (Enable Alarm).
b If the protection element is “Enable Trip” configured it means that it is set to the General Trip Command ("Protect. Trip"),
which can be used in I/O configuration.
b If the protection element is “Enable Alarm” it means that it is set to the General Alarm Command ("Alarm"), which can be
used in I/O configuration.
0.5 x Ien
IN>> Threshold
2.5 x Ien
IN>> Threshold
tIN>>
NRJED112402EN
2.0 x Ien
0.01 x Ien
0.05 x Ien
10.0 x Ien
0.01 x Ien
b Pick-up setting for second stage of the overcurrent element.
b For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.05-10Ien, where Ien: nominal current for e/f input.
5 x Ien
IN>> Threshold
0.01 x Ien
b Pick-up setting for second stage of the e/f overcurrent element.
b For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.01-2Ien, where Ien: nominal current for e/f input.
0.2 x Ien
40.0 x Ien
0.1 x Ien
b Pick-up setting for second stage of the e/f overcurrent element.
b For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.2-40Ien, where Ien: nominal current for e/f input.
0.1 s
0s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this stage.
61
MiCOM P115
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Function
Default
min.
max.
Step
[50/51] Phase overcurrent
Disabled
2
I> ?
Disabled, Enable Trip,
Enable Alarm
b Setting for Disable or enable of protection element.
b It is possible to enable for tripping CB (Enable Trip) or enable for an Alarm signal only (Enable Alarm).
b If the protection element is “Enable Trip” configured it means that it is set to the General Trip Command ("Protect. Trip"),
which can be used in I/O configuration.
b If the protection element is “Enable Alarm” it means that it is set to the General Alarm Command ("Alarm"), which can be
used in I/O configuration.
I> Threshold
I> Delay Type
1.4 x In
0.2 x In
4.0 x In
0.01 x In
b Pick-up setting for first stage of the overcurrent element.
IEC SI
DMT, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, UK STI, UK RC, RI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US
CO2, US CO8
b Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage overcurrent element.
tI>
I> TMS
I> Time Dial
Reset Delay Type I>
DMT tReset I>
1s
0.02 s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage element.
1s
0.02 s
1.6 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC, UK, and RI IDMT characteristic
1s
0.02 s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
DMT
DMT or IDMT
b Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves.
0s
0s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
Disabled Disabled, Enable Trip, Enable Alarm
I>> ?
b Setting for Disable or enable of protection element.
b It is possible to enable for tripping CB (Enable Trip) or enable for an Alarm signal only (Enable Alarm).
b If the protection element is “Enable Trip” configured it means that it is set to the General Trip Command ("Protect. Trip"),
which can be used in I/O configuration.
b If the protection element is “Enable Alarm” it means that it is set to the General Alarm Command ("Alarm"), which can be
used in I/O configuration.
I>> Threshold
Delay Type I>>
tI>>
I>> TMS
I>> Time Dial
Reset Delay Type I>>
DMT tReset I>>
1.4 x In
0.2 x In
4.0 x In
0.01 x In
b Pick-up setting for second stage of the overcurrent element.
IEC SI
DMT, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, UK STI, UK RC, RI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US
CO2, US CO8
b Setting for the tripping characteristic for this stage overcurrent element.
1s
0.02 s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this stage element.
1s
0.02 s
1.6 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC, UK, and RI IDMT characteristic.
1s
0.02 s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
DMT
DMT or IDMT
b Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves.
0s
0s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
Disabled Disabled, Enable Trip, Enable Alarm
I>>> ?
b Setting for Disable or enable of protection element.
b It is possible to enable for tripping CB (Enable Trip) or enable for an Alarm signal only (Enable Alarm).
b If the protection element is “Enable Trip” configured it means that it is set to the General Trip Command ("Protect. Trip"),
which can be used in I/O configuration.
b If the protection element is “Enable Alarm” it means that it is set to the General Alarm Command ("Alarm"), which can be
used in I/O configuration.
62
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P115
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Function
Default
min.
max.
Step
[50/51] Phase overcurrent
I>>> Threshold
tI>>>
4 x In
0.2 x In
40.0 x In
0.1 x In
200 s
0.01 s
b Pick-up setting for third stage of the overcurrent element.
0.1 s
0s
2
b Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this stage element.
AUX Timers
Disabled
AUX1 ?
Disabled, Enable Trip, Enable Alarm
b Setting for Disable or enable of AUX1 element.
b It is possible to enable for tripping CB (Enable Trip) or enable for an Alarm signal only (Enable Alarm)
b If the protection element is “Enable Trip” configured it means that it is set to the General Trip Command ("Protect. Trip"),
which can be used in I/O configuration.
b If the protection element is “Enable Alarm” it means that it is set to the General Alarm Command ("Alarm"), which can be
used in I/O configuration.
tAUX1
10 s
Disabled
AUX2 ?
0s
200 s
0.01 s
b Setting for the operating time-delay for AUX1 function.
Disabled, Enable Trip, Enable Alarm
b Setting for Disable or enable of AUX2 element.
b It is possible to enable for tripping CB (Enable Trip) or enable for an Alarm signal only (Enable Alarm).
b If the protection element is “Enable Trip” configured it means that it is set to the Genera Trip Command ("Protect. Trip"),
which can be used in I/O configuration.
b If the protection element is “Enable Alarm” it means that it is set to the General Alarm Command ("Alarm"), which can be
used in I/O configuration.
tAUX2
10 s
0s
200 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
10 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
5s
0.01 s
65000 mn
1 mn
b Setting for the operating time-delay for AUX2 function.
Circuit Breaker
0.5 s
tOpen Pulse min
b Defines the duration of the
trip pulse
tClose Pulse min
0.5 s
b Defines the duration of the close pulse
5760 mn (4 days)
tP pulse
Note: E.g RL4 configured to this function can be used to switch on an auxiliary voltage supply after tripping, for a fixed period
(for example four days). Thus ensuring communication and signaling facilities. After the fixed period Auxiliary Voltage can
be disconnected from the P115's terminals automatically to save a substation battery.
16 s
CB not Healthy
1 mn
b Defines the duration of the trip pulse. This pulse can be used for longer signaling of trips.
1s
200 s
1s
b If the circuit breaker does not indicate a healthy condition in this time period following a close command, then the relay will
lockout and set off an alarm.
NRJED112402EN
63
MiCOM P115
MiCOM series 10
Base unit
Presentation
PM103530
User-Machine Interface (HMI)
All functions, including protection, automation, communication, LEDs, inputs and
outputs, can be programmed and modified using the front panel user interface
(Human Machine Interface).
The backlit LCD informs the user about settings, measurements & faults with a
pull-down menu structure allowing easy and quick access to any data.
Working language
The relay display language can be changed in the menu system.
All the texts and messages displayed on HMI are available in 1 serie of languages:
b English/German/French/ Spanish/Polish
Wiring
Terminal block connections are made via screw terminals.
b AC Current Input Terminals
Threaded M3 screw-type plug-in terminals, with wire protection for conductor
cross-section
0.2 - 6mm single-core
0.2 - 4mm finely stranded
b General Input/Output Terminals
For power supply, binary inputs, output contacts and COM for rear
communications.
Threaded M3 screw-type plug-in terminals, with wire protection for conductor
cross-section
0.2 - 4mm single-core
0.2 - 2.5mm finely stranded
Communication
Type Port
Physical Link
Connectors
Data Rate
Comms. mode
Protocol
RS485
(Rear
communications
port)
Screened twisted
pair cables:
multi-endpoint
link max. 100 m
Screws or snap-on
b 4800 bauds
b Data Bit: 8
b Stop bit: 1 or 2
b Parity: Even or
Odd or no parity
b Address: 1 to 254
b Modbus RTU,
b IEC60870-5-103
(selectable in menu)
or
b 9600 bauds
or
b 19200 bauds
USB
USB2.0
PC: type A male
P115: type mini B
male
64
115.2 kbits/s (fixed)
b
b
b
b
Data Bit:8
Stop bit: 1
Parity: None
Address: 1
Isolation to SELV
level
b Modbus RTU
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Base unit
(cont.)
P115 flush mounting case
2
DM101169EN
Dimensions & weight
Dimensions
b Height
183 mm
b Width
160 mm
b Depth
107 mm
2
Weight
b P115
NRJED112402EN
approx.1 Kg
65
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Base unit
(cont.)
Green “Healthy” LED.
Red “Trip” LED Any trip of
protection
3
4
5
6
2
9
3
Red programmable LED
7
10
4
5
8
9
1
16 character by 2-line
alphanumeric liquid crystal
display (LCD)
10 A clear key 1
11 A read key,
11
6
12
7
8
12 4 arrow keys, an enter key
13 USB port for local connection
13
Rear panel description
PM103531
2
1
2
PM103530
Front panel description
14
15
14 3 terminal block: Auxiliary
voltage supply, Binary inputs,
Binary outputs, Flag indicator
energy output, Low energy trip
coil
15 2 terminal block: RS485
16 1 terminal block: phase and e/f
current inputs
17 PCT Protective (Earth) Conductor
terminal
16
17
66
NRJED112402EN
2
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Base unit
(cont.)
DM101172EN
External connection diagrams
2
Vx
Binary
inputs
Binary
output
MiCOM P115:
Typical 3 phase CTs connection.
Binary
output
Optional
Binary output
Optional
Binary output
Flag indicator
24V / 0.01Ws
Optional output
for low energy
trip coil:
12 - 24Vdc/0.1J (Ws)
or MiTOP
USB
Optional
RS485
DM101171EN
P115
Phase to phase
voltage from a
substation auxiliary
transformer or from VT
Binary
inputs
MiCOM P115:
Typical 3 phase CTs + Core balanced CT connection.
The P115 is not supplied via a Core Balance CT. An auxiliary
voltage source should be connected to the 11-12 terminals in
order to ensure that the P115 is supplied for earth fault currents
below 0.2 In.
Binary
output
Binary
output
Optional
Binary output
Optional
Binary output
Flag indicator
24V / 0.01Ws
Optional output
for low energy
trip coil:
12 - 24Vdc/0.1J (Ws)
or MiTOP
P115
NRJED112402EN
USB
Optional
RS485
67
Typical 3 phase CTs + Core balanced CT connection.
The P115 is not supplied via a Core Balance CT. An auxiliary voltage source should be connected
to the 11-12 terminals in order to ensure that the P115 is supplied for earth fault currents below 0.2 In.
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Base unit
DM101173EN
(cont.)
P2
S2
S2
2
MiCOM P115:
Typical 2 phase CTs + Core balanced CT connection.
P1
S2
S1
A
S1
B
C
S1
1
11
2
12
3
The P115 is not supplied via a Core Balance CT. An auxiliary
voltage source should be connected to the 11-12 terminals in
order to ensure that the P115 is supplied for earth fault currents
below 0.2 In.
4
If the phase to phase voltage can’t be applied (11-12
terminals), a core balanced CT can be connected to 7-9
terminal to supply P115. But this application requires a Core
Balanced CT which can provide enough energy to supply the
P115.
7
Phase to phase
voltage from a
substation auxiliary
transformer or from VT
13
L1
14
L2
5
Vx
Binary
inputs
15
6
16
RL1
17
8
Binary
output
18
9
19
10
RL2
20
Binary
output
21
22
RL3
23
24
RL4
25
Optional
Binary output
Optional
Binary output
26
+
-
-
P115
68
27
F-
28
T+
+
USB
F+
T-
29
30
T-
31
T+
32
Flag indicator
24V / 0.01Ws
Optional output
for low energy
trip coil:
12 - 24Vdc/0.1J (Ws)
or MiTOP
Optional
RS485
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Base unit
(cont.)
DM101174EN
Application connection diagrams
Auxiliary Power
supply (Vx)
A
B
C
ac Auxiliary
Voltage
LEDs
Healthy
11
Trip
12
H3
Current inputs
Trip
element
0.5 (1) A
H4
1 Measuring
IA
2
H5
Power
Supply
3 Measuring
H6
IB
4
H7
5 Measuring
H8
IC
6
Power
Supply
IN
7
8
9
16
Trip
RL1
Measuring
19
13
3
4
5
WF
MiCOM P115 powered by a WA 25 O / 2 pole:
31
WC
13
b1
24
RL4
+ #
25
RS485
#
Note:
An auxiliary voltage supply is
recommendd to have RS485
communication facilities
12
23
Communication
interface RS485
9
b2
22
RL3
32
11
21
L2
15
WD
WB
20
RL2
14
7
WE
WA
Connection example for a P115 powered by a WA 25 O and
with a 2 pole connection (A - C)
L1
6
17
18
Signal inputs
1
2
Output relays
Energy outputs
Flag indicator output 27
+
28
14
MiCOM
P115
b2
WA 25 O
Hardware configuration of WA 25
for Trip element 0.5A or 1A
11
12
13
14
b2
b2
Trip element: 1 A
11
12
13
14
DM101175EN
b1
Trip element: 0.5 A
Figure 8:
Auxiliary Power
Healthy
Connection example for a P115 powered by
a WA
25 O LEDs
and with
a 2 pole
supply
(Vx)
11
connectionA(A-C)
Trip
ac Auxiliary
B
C
Voltage
12
H3
Current inputs
Trip
element
0.5 (1) A
H4
1 Measuring
IA
2
H5
3 Measuring
Power
Supply
H6
IB
4
H7
5 Measuring
H8
IC
6
Power
Supply
IN
7
8
9
Output relays
16
Trip
RL1
Signal inputs
19
13
1
4
3
5
WF
MiCOM P115 powered by a WA 25 O / 3 pole:
6
WE
WA
L1
7
31
WC
32
Connection example for a P115 powered by a WA 25 O and
with a 3 pole connection (A - B - C)
12
13
b1
b2
22
RL3
23
+ #
#
WA 25 O
25
RS485
Energy outputs
Flag indicator output 27
+
28
14
b2
24
RL4
Note:
An auxiliary voltage supply is
recommendd to have RS485
communication facilities
9
11
21
L2
Communication
interface RS485
WD
WB
20
RL2
14
15
17
18
Measuring
MiCOM
P115
Hardware configuration of WA 25
for Trip element 0.5A or 1A
11
12
13
14
b2
b2
Trip element: 1 A
11
12
13
14
b1
Trip element: 0.5 A
Figure 7:
NRJED112402EN
Connection example for a P115 powered by a WA 25 O and with a 3 pole
connection (A-B-C)
69
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Base unit
DM101176 EN
(cont.)
Auxiliary Power
supply (Vx)
A
B
C
ac Auxiliary
Voltage
LEDs
Healthy
11
Trip
12
H3
Current inputs
Trip
element
0.5 (1) A
H4
1 Measuring
IA
2
H5
3 Measuring
Power
Supply
H6
IB
4
H7
5 Measuring
Power
Supply
IN
7
8
9
2
H8
IC
6
Output relays
16
RL1
Signal inputs
19
13
4
MiCOM P115 powered by a WA 25 O / 4 pole:
Connection example for a P115 powered by a WA 25 O and
with a 4 pole connection (A - B - C - N)
3
5
WF
6
WE
WA
L1
7
31
WC
32
12
13
b1
b2
RS485
23
24
RL4
#
21
25
Energy outputs
Note:
An auxiliary voltage supply is Flag indicator output 27
recommendd to have RS485
+
communication facilities
9
11
RL3
+ #
20
22
L2
Communication
interface RS485
WD
WB
RL2
14
15
17
18
Measuring
1
Trip
28
14
b2
WA 25 O
MiCOM
P115
Hardware configuration of WA 25
for Trip element 0.5A or 1A
11
12
13
14
b2
b2
Trip element: 1 A
11
12
13
14
b1
Trip element: 0.5 A
70
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P115
Base unit
DM101177EN
(cont.)
A
B
C
Auxiliary voltage
(ac or dc)
Auxiliary Power
supply (Vx)
LEDs
Healthy
11
Optional connection
Trip element
(a powerful trip
coil, for example
220Vdc)
Trip
12
H3
Current inputs
H4
Measuring
1
IA
2
H5
Power
Supply
Measuring
3
H6
IB
4
5
H7
Measuring
H8
IC
6
Power
Supply
IN
7
8
9
Output relays
17
18
Signal inputs
19
13
Capacitor
Trip Unit
MiCOM E 124
MiCOM P115 powered by a MiCOM E124 (4 pole)
Connection example for a P115 powered by an E124 and with
a 4 pole connection (A - B - C - N).
Up to 300 Vdc / 59 J
AUX1 AUX2
The earth input supplies the relay.
11
10
VD-
VD+
6
2
L1
20
RL2
21
14
22
L2
15
RL3
23
Communication
interface RS485
31
24
RL4
+ #
32
2
16
Trip
RL1
Measuring
25
RS485
#
Note:
An auxiliary voltage supply is
recommendd to have RS485
communication facilities
Energy outputs
Flag indicator output
+
27
28
MiCOM
P115
DM101178EN
Figure 9:
Connection example for a P115 powered by an E124 and with a 4 pole
connection (A-B-C-N). The earth input supplies the relay (refer to
Application chapter: P115/EN AP).
A
B
C
Phase to phase ac voltage
from substation auxiliary
transformer or VT
Auxiliary Power
supply (Vx)
LEDs
Healthy
11
Optional connection
Trip element
(a powerful trip
coil, for example
220Vdc)
Trip
12
H3
Current inputs
IA
2
H5
Power
Supply
Measuring
3
H6
IB
4
5
H7
Measuring
H8
IC
6
Power
Supply
IN
7
8
9
MiCOM P115 powered by a MiCOM E124 (4 pole)
H4
Measuring
1
Output relays
16
Trip
RL1
Signal inputs
Connection example for a P115 powered by an E124 and with
a 4 pole connection (A - B - C - N).
19
13
Capacitor
Trip Unit
MiCOM E 124
The P115 is not supplied via the earth input.
Up to 300 Vdc / 59 J
AUX1 AUX2
10
11
VD-
VD+
6
2
L1
20
RL2
21
14
22
L2
15
RL3
23
Communication
interface RS485
31
32
17
18
Measuring
24
RL4
+ #
#
25
RS485
Note:
An auxiliary voltage supply is
recommendd to have RS485
communication facilities
Energy outputs
Flag indicator output
+
27
28
MiCOM
P115
Figure 10: Connection example for a P115 powered by an E124 and with a 4 pole
connection (A-B-C-N). The P115 is not supplied via the earth input.
(refer to Application chapter: P115/EN AP).
NRJED112402EN
71
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Numerical CT and Vx Auxiliary VoltagePowered Overcurrent Relays
PM103535
Application
The MiCOM P116 numerical overcurrent protection relays provide an optimized and
cost efficient solution where no external auxiliary power supply is available or
guaranteed.
Typical applications are:
b Utility and industrial substation fitted with cost-optimized MV switchboards
b HV back-up protection (HV/MV transformers)
b Retrofit relays of old technology, particularly during installation of DCS systems.
2
In addition to its protection functions and when powered by an external auxiliary
supply, the dual-powered P116 is able to transmit recorded and measured data to a
supervisor through communication networks. Should the auxiliary power supply (Vx)
fail, protection and tripping functions remain fully operational.
MiCOM P116 relays draw the power necessary to their operation from the line’s
current transformers and/or the auxiliary voltage supply (Vx).
Main features
MiCOM P116 are innovative CT-powered
numerical relays for use anywhere, when
auxiliary voltage is not available/guaranteed.
MiCOM P116 are numerical relays designed to offer
overcurrent and earth fault protection without requiring
a guaranteed external auxiliary supply.
They can be applied to medium and high voltage
electrical systems as either main or backup protection.
When supervision functions are required, the
dual-powered relay offers additional measurement,
monitoring and recording functions.
The P116 can be fully configured manually, without
using setting software.Alternatively, MiCOM S1 Studio
setting software allows configuration parameters to be
modified for a specific application via the USB port.
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU integrated
communication protocols are available for flexible
integration into most substation control or DCS
systems.
A capacitance discharge output is able to provide
sufficient power to energise a circuit breaker’s low
energy trip coil or MiTOP. An external flag indicator is
used for remote or local indication that a trip has
occurred. Accessories such as low energy striker or
capacitor trip unit are also available to fit your particular
application.
For Flush or Wall Mounted applications, an optional
secondary case is available for ease of installation.
Two hardware options are available:
Model A (Dual powered)
Model L (CT powered only)
Customer benefits
b No need for a guaranteed auxiliary power supply
b Small dimensions of relay
b USB port for local communication with self-
powering facilities
b Additional measurement, monitoring, recording
and communication features
b FRAM memory: Battery back-up not required
72
The power supply to the electronic circuits of the MiCOM P116 has been optimised
so that it can trigger the circuit-breaker with a load current of 0.2 In on at least one
phase. The scope of functionality depends on the following CT powering threshold:
b (I1+I2+I3+IN) < 0.65 In: all protection and recording functions, RL1, trip energy
and flag indicators are active. But in order to save power – reduce the consumption
of energy from the CTs (i.e. lower CT requirements), outputs contacts RL2-RL6, the
LCD display, the LEDs and the RS485 port are switched off.
b (I1+I2+I3+IN) > 0.65 In: full functionality.
The front panel includes an electromagnetic bistable flag to indicate that a trip has
occurred. As an option in the dual-powered P116, four additional magnetic indicator
flags are configurable.
8 LEDs indicate the correct operation of the relay as well as other information
regarding the protection of the electrical system.
The hardware architecture and software algorithms have been designed to operate
on very short failure detection times. Tripping occurs typically within no more than 40
ms (for a switch-on-to-fault condition without Vx auxiliary voltage: typically 70 ms.
This time includes 30 ms for P116 booting).
The standard flush mounting case is fitted with a CT circuit-shorting solution: a plug
is built into some of the P116’s terminals so that it is possible to withdraw only
removable terminals even if the CB is closed and there are currents present.
For easier withdrawal of the P116 from the front of the switchgear panel, the
standard P116 case can be fitted in an optional flush mounting secondary case
(P116 accessories).
For wall- or plate-mounting of the P116, the wall-mounting cassette is used (P116
accessories).
Main functions
The circuit-breaker can be tripped using internal tripping energy (capacitor charge
within the P116), drawn from the fault’s energy (CTs) and/or from the auxiliary
voltage.
The capacitor discharge energy from P116 is sufficient for energising a sensitive CB
trip coil (12-24Vdc /0.1J), MiTOP, or a striker (P116 accessories), thus releasing the
actuating mechanism of the circuit-breaker.
For legacy CB applications (not fitted with a sensitive CB coil) the trip command can
be based on the energy stored in the microprocessor capacitor trip unit - MiCOM
E124 (P116 accessories). A relay output can send a command directly to the
standard circuit-breaker coil. This solution is easier to install than the striker solution,
as no mechanical connection with the CB is required. However is is necessary to
guarantee the auxiliary supply for charging of the E124. Approximately 1 minute of
charge can ensure E124 is ready to operate for over 8 days.
E124 provides two independent capacitor banks.
If an auxiliary voltage (Vx): AC or DC, is available, redundant tripping commands can
be executed using P116’s relay contacts and substation auxiliary voltage.
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Ratings
Power supply (Model A)
b 24 – 60 Vdc/ 24 – 60 Vac (50/60 Hz)
b 60 – 250 Vdc/ 60 – 240 Vac (50/60 Hz)
b 19 – 72 V (dc), 19 – 66 V (ac)
b 48 – 300 V (dc), 48 – 264 V (ac)
Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx (ordering options)
Operating range
Tolerable AC ripple
Up to 12% for a dc supply, per IEC 60255-11: 2008
Nominal Burden - Auxiliary Power Supply Vx
(Initial position: no output nor LED energized / Active position: all outputs and LEDs energized)
S (VA)
Vx (V)
24
24 - 60 Vac
For ac max. (approx.)
60 - 240 Vac
Active position
3.1
5.5
48
2.8
6.0
60
2.7
5.2
100/110
3.1
5.7
220/230
5.1
7.4
264
6.1
8.4
Vx (V)
For dc Vx voltage max. (approx.)
Initial position
2
P (W)
Initial position
Active position
24 - 60 Vac
1.5
3.7
60 - 240 Vac
1.5
3.7
Auxiliary Power Supply Voltage Interruption (without powering by CT)
IEC 60255-11: 2008
Interruption of the auxiliary supply
without de-energizing.
EN 61000-4-11: 1997
Within the auxiliary supply range:
b 48-250Vdc, the relay will withstand a 50 ms
b 24-48Vdc, the relay will withstand a 20 ms
Within the auxiliary supply range:
b 48-250Vac, the relay will withstand a 50 ms
b 24-48Vac, the relay will withstand a 20 ms
Power-up Time for Auxiliary Supply Voltage only (not includes charging of the energy outputs)
Time to power up via auxiliary supply only (not powered by CT)
0.04 s
Current inputs
Nominal Frequency
50 or 60 Hz (selectable in P116 menu)
Phase current inputs
Nominal current (In)
1 or 5 A (ordering option)
RMS measurement in range
40 Hz – 1 kHz
Fundamental harmonic measurement in range
40 Hz – 70 Hz
Operating range
0.1 – 40 In
Nominal Burden at In (without tripping condition)
b < 2.3 VA (for In = 1 A)
b < 2.1 VA (for In = 5 A)
Thermal withstand
b 1 s @ 100 x rated current
b 2 s @ 40 x rated current
Connection
Refer to section 12 of P116 Installation chapter (P116/EN IN)
Current transformer requirements
Detailed information and CT requirements are given in the Application chapter (P116/EN AP)
b 10 s @ 30 x rated current
b continuous @ 3 x rated current
Earth current inputs
Nominal current (Ien)
1 or 5 A (ordering option)
Fundamental harmonic measurement in range
40 Hz – 70 Hz
Operating range
b 0.002-1 Ien
b or 0.01-8I en
b or 0.1 - 40 Ien
(ordering option)
Nominal Burden at In (without tripping condition)
b < 2.3 VA (for Ien = 1 A)
b < 2.1 VA (for Ien = 5 A)
Thermal withstand
b 1 s @ 100 x rated current
b 2 s @ 40 x rated current
Current transformer requirements
Detailed information and CT requirements are given in the P116 technical manual
NRJED112402EN
b 10 s @ 30 x rated current
b continuous @ 3 x rated current
73
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Ratings
(cont.)
Minimum Level of Current Required for Relay Powering
Phase current / Earth current with reduced functionality
b Active outputs: RL1, Trip electromagnetic flag and
Energy output for sensitive CB coil).
b LCD, LEDs, RL2-RL6, RS485,
programmable electromagnetic flags are inactive
b > 0.65 In in one phase
b > In = IA - IB + IC + IN
Phase current with full functionality
2
> 0.2 In in one phase
Powering of P116 from earth input is selectable by using proper terminals (A7-8: with powering or A9-10: without powering) and additionally by configuration
in P116 menu (GLOBAL SETTINGS/CT RATIO/IN connection). Detailed information is given in the Setting chapter (P116/EN ST) and Installation chapter
(P116/EN IN).
Note:
b Depending on the terminal connections and configuration in menu, the earth fault input supplies the P116 (connection to terminals A7 and A8) or does not
supply the P116 (connection to terminals A9 and A10) (refer to Installation chapter: P116/EN IN)
b If the sum of the currents that power the P116 is below 0.65 In (example: 2 phase (A-B) fault – the sum equal to:
0.65 In = IA: 0.325 In - IB: - 0.325 In + IC: 0 In + IN: 0 Ien), the LED indications, Electromagnetic Flag indicators (Front Panel): 2 - 5, the display and the RS485
comms. are switched off and RL2, RL3, RL4, RL5 and RL6, WD are not energized. Depending on the setting, the earth current is included or not in the above sum
(refer to Settings chapter: P116/EN ST).
Phase and Earth Current Transformers Consumption - P116 current input resistance in tripping condition
Rp for a single current input (Ohms) approx.
I
b The P116's current input resistance depends on the value of
the current. The table shows the resistance for a single current
input of the P116: In = 1 A / 5 A.
b If earth input supply P116, for phase -earth fault analysis it is
necessary to take into account a double value of the
resistance, as shown in Table
In (Ien) = 1 A
In (Ien) = 5 A
0.2
31.06
1.219
0.5
7.63
0.225
1
2.89
0.074
2
0.791
0.035
3
0.475
0.024
4
0.328
0.019
5
0.317
0.019
10
0.250
0.016
20
0.235
0.016
30
0.241
0.016
Binary Inputs (Model A)
Binary Inputs
Setting in menu
Filtering time
Nominal
Voltage range
Voltage
operating
range
Min.
polarisation
voltage
Max.
polarisation
current
Maximum
holding current
after 2 ms
Maximum
continuous
withstand
dc
5 ms
24 – 250 Vdc
19.5 – 300 Vdc
19.5 Vdc
35 mA
2.3 mA
300 Vdc
ac
b 7.5 ms (at 50 Hz)
b 6.25 ms (at 60 Hz)
24 – 240 Vac
19.5 – 264 Vac
19.5 Vac
35 mA
20 mA
264 Vac
24 – 250 Vdc
48 – 240 Vac
b 19.5 – 300
Vdc
b 39.4 – 264
Vac
b 19.5 Vdc
b 39.4 Vac
35 mA
ENA (ac/dc)
b 15 ms (at 50 Hz)
b 12.5 ms (at 60 Hz)
b dc : 2.3 mA
b ac : 20 mA
b 300 Vdc
b 264 Vac
220 Vdc
5 ms
220 Vdc
154 – 264 Vdc
154 Vdc
3.5 mA (at 220 Vdc)
264 Vdc
129 Vdc
5 ms
129 Vdc
105 – 145 Vdc
105 Vdc
3.5 mA (at 129 Vdc)
264 Vdc
110 Vdc
5 ms
110 Vdc
77 – 132 Vdc
77 Vdc
3.5 mA (at 110 Vdc)
264 Vdc
74
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Ratings
(cont.)
Binary input energy consumption (holding current)
Logic input burden for dc, ac, ENA
b < 18 mA per input (at 24 Vac) RMS value
b < 15 mA per input (at 48 Vac) RMS value
b < 10 mA per input (at 110 Vac) RMS value
b < 8 mA per input (at 127 Vac) RMS value
b < 2.5 mA per input (at 230 Vac) RMS value
b <2.3 mA per input (at 24-240 Vdc)
Logic input burden for 220Vdc, 129Vdc, 110Vdc
b < 3.5 mA per input (at nominal voltage)
Logic input recognition time
As filtering time + 5 ms ± 5 ms
Impulse Output for the Trip Coil
2
Output Relay Characteristics
Trip energy
Contact ratings
Required nominal parameters of sensitive CB coils, MiTOP
or strikers connected to Energy output
Contact relay
Dry contact, Ag Ni
Carry capability
5 A continuous
From nominal voltage
12 to 24 Vdc
Rated Voltage
250 Vac
E ≤ 0.1 J
The trip energy for the trip coil is stored by a capacitor
built into the protection relay. The capacitors are charged
by a current input or the auxiliary voltage. The duration of
the trip pulse is 50 ms (if output is not burden). The pause
between the individual pulses depends on the impedance
of the trip coil and on the current level. The pulse lasts as
long as the activation threshold is exceeded. During the trip
pulse, the capacitor is unplugged from the charging source
so the voltage level of the energy output depends on the
discharging time.
Impulse Output for Flag Indicator or
Auxiliary Relay (Model A)
Trip energy
Required nominal
parameters of the
standalone flag indicator
connected to Energy output
Breaking characteristics for RL1, RL2 (Model A), RL1, WD (Model L)
AC breaking capacity
b 1250 VA resistive (cos = unity)
b 1250 VA inductive (cos = 0.7)
Short-duration capacity
25 A for 3 s
Making capacity
150 A for 30 ms
AC breaking capacity
b 1250 VA resistive (cos = unity)
b 1250 VA inductive (cos • = 0.7)
DC breaking capacity
250 Vdc;
b 50 W resistive
b 35 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
Operation time
<10 ms
Durability
Loaded contact
10 000 operations minimum
Unloaded contact
100 000 operations minimum
Breaking characteristics for RL3, RL4 (Model A)
E ≤ 0.01 J, 24 Vdc
The trip energy for the flag indicator is stored by a capacitor
built into the protection relay. The capacitors are charged
by a current input or the auxiliary voltage. The duration of
the trip pulse is 50 ms (if output is not burden). The pause
between the individual pulses depends on the impedance of
the flag indicator and on the current level. The pulse lasts as
long as the activation threshold is exceeded
AC breaking capacity
1000 VA resistive (cos = unity)
1000 VA inductive (cos = 0.7)
Short-duration capacity
10 A for 3 s
Making capacity
50 A for 30 ms
DC breaking capacity
250 Vdc;
b 30 W resistive
b 15 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
Operation time
< 10 ms
Durability
Loaded contact
10 000 operations minimum
Unloaded contact
100 000 operations minimum
Breaking characteristics for RL5, RL6, RL0 (WD) (Model A)
AC breaking capacity
b 1250 VA resistive (cos = unity)
b 1250 VA inductive (cos = 0.7)
Short-duration capacity
20 A for 3 s
Making capacity
100 A for 30 ms
DC breaking capacity
Operation time
250 Vdc;
b 50 W resistive
b 25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
<10 ms
Durability
NRJED112402EN
Loaded contact
10000 operations minimum
Unloaded contact
100000 operations minimum
75
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Protection functions
Functional Overview
DM101170EN
(Description of ANSI code nos. see Functions Table below)
2
USB Port
Rear Port
Setting
Software S1
or S1 Studio
RS485 Port
DCS
System
Output for low energy CB
coil charged in real time
(externe fast charged)
Recording features
Auxiliary
power
supply (Vx)
Outputs Relay:
RL1
Alarm recording:
5
Flag indicators:
Trip
Event recording:
200
Outputs Relays:
RL2 - RL6
Dist. recorder:
up to 6 s
LEDs:
8
Counters
Binary inputs:
6
Start of protection
recording: 5
Close and Trip
functional keys
Internal
energy for
powering
of
electronic
boards
CT
power
supply
79
I,IN
50/51
AUXILIARY Functions
Fault recording:
20
Output for external
flag indicator
(externe fast charged)
CB
I/O features
MEASUREMENTS
b SOTF (Switch-on-to-Fault)
b Peak and Rolling demand
b Self Diagnostic
b Memorising of latched LEDs
and output relays (86)
b Phase current
b Residual current
b Trip, start, alarm, counters
- CB electrical operation
counter
b Blocking logic
b Cold Load Pick-Up
b Selective Scheme Logic
b 4 Auxiliary timers
b CB Local / Remote
b CB Monitorong
b Time Synchronisation via
Binary input
b CB mechanical operation
counter
b Relay Maintenance Mode
b Remote Ctrl on Output
Relays
b Trip Circuit Supervision
b Autoreclose counters
16 x 2 alphanumerical
LCD Display
86
50N
51N
49
46
46BC
50BF
37
MiCOM P116 (Model A)
Numerical CT and Vx auxiliary voltage-powered overcurrent relay
Function available even if P116 is powered from CTs only, however inputs
must be triggered from an additional source of power supply
Function available if Vx is present on P116 terminals
ANSI Code
Functions
37
Undercurrent
Model A Model L
b
46
Negative phase sequence overcurrent
b
46BC
Broken conductor detection (I2/I1)
b
49
Thermal overload (true RMS): 2 independent thresholds (Alarm, Trip)
b
b
50BF
Circuit breaker failure
b
b
50/51
Three-phase non directional overcurrent: 3 independent thresholds (12 groups of IDMT curves)
b
b
50N/51N
Phase-earth non directional overcurrent: 3 independent thresholds (12 groups of IDMT curves)
b
b
50/51
Switch on to fault (SOTF)
b
79
Autorecloser option (4 shots) (Note 2)
b
86
Output relay latching (Note 1)
b
(Note 1): Function available even if the P116 is not supplied from the Vx auxiliary power but currents must be higher than the CT powering threshold:
In = IA + IB + IC + IN > 0.65 In
(Note 2): Function available if P116 is supplied from the Vx auxiliary power supply
76
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Protection functions
(cont.)
Functions
Model A Model L
Inrush blocking
b
Blocking logic (Note 1)
b
Selective relay scheme logic (Note 1)
b
Cold load pick-up (Note 1)
b
2 setting groups (Note 1)
b
Output for MiTOP, low energy sensitive (12-24VDC/0.1J) CB coil or striker
b
Output for standalone flag indicator (24VDC/0.01J)
b
b
b
b
b
Freely configurable binary inputs / outputs contacts (watchdog contact WD included)
6/7
0/2
8 signalling LEDs (“Healthy” + “Trip” + “Alarm” + 5 freely configurable LEDs) (Note 2)
b
b
Circuit breaker supervision and counters (Note 1)
b
1 “Trip“ (standard option) + 4 (ordering option, configurable) electro-magnetic indicator flags (Model A)
2
b
Trip circuit supervision
Fault records for 20 most recent trips / Alarm records for the 5 most recent alarms
b /b
b /-
Event records (up to 200 events)
b
Disturbance records (up to 6 s)
b
b
Front USB port for local downloading of settings, events and/or fault records with self-supplying facilities
b
b
Rear port RS485 communications (Modbus RTU and IEC60870-5-103) (Note 2)
b
Time synchronization: via rear communications port (DCS) and/or via digital input (external clock) (Note 1)
b
Measurements (Note 2)
b
Maximum and mean current values
b
Setting software: MiCOM S1 and/or S1 Studio
b
b
Optional cassette (adaptor) for: wall-mounted or flush-mounted solution with withdrawable feature
b
b
b
(Note 1): Function available even if the P116 is supplied from CTs only (without Vx /loss of Vx), but in this case inputs must be triggered from an additional power
supply source
(Note 2): Function available even if the P116 is not supplied from the Vx auxiliary power but currents must be higher than the CT powering threshold:
In = IA + IB + IC + IN > 0.65 In
Undercurent Protection (37)
MiCOM P116 relays provide definite time undercurrent protection. This function
allows typical applications such as loss of load or simple broken conductor detection.
The undercurrent stage can be blocked when the circuit breaker is opened.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46)
The MiCOM P116 relays include a programmable function specially designed to
detect unbalanced load or fault conditions.
The negative sequence overcurrent (I2>) stage has the same setting ranges as the
phase overcurrent function.
DM101185EN
Thus, a negative sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-tophase and phase-to-earth faults.
Tripping Characteristics
Broken Conductor (46BC)
Time
I th
A typical unbalanced fault that can occur on the system is an open circuit fault. This
fault can arise from a broken conductor, a discrepancy in the position of the poles of
one switchgear or a blown fuse.
MiCOM P116 relays can measure the ratio of negative to positive sequence current
(I2/I1).
I>
t>
This fully programmable function offers more sensitivity and stability than pure
negative sequence measurement.
I>>
I<
The I2> stage can be independently selected as a definite time DMT) or inverse
time-delay (IDMT) with different types of curves (IEC, IEEE/ANSI, RI, RECT).
t>>
I>>>
t>>>
Thermal Overload (49)
The protection of transformers and cables must take into account their particular
thermal characteristics.
Current
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P116 relays include a thermal replica element based on the true RMS value
of the current, up to the 10th harmonic. Alarm and Trip overload thresholds and time
constant are fully programmable to match each application requirement.
77
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Protection functions
(cont.)
Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF)
The circuit breaker failure protection function verifies the effective opening of the CB
using a dedicated undercurrent threshold.
The circuit breaker failure function can be activated by the trip of an internal
protection function and/or an external command through the relevant digital input.
The circuit breaker failure protection function can also be used to trip upstream
circuit breakers.
Three-Phase Overcurrent (50/51) and Earth Fault Overcurrent
(50N/51N)
2
Three independent stages are available both for phase and earth fault protection.
For the first and second (50/51 only) stages the user may independently select a
definite time delay (DMT) or an inverse time delay (IDMT) with different types of
curves (IEC, IEEE/ANSI, RI, RECT).
Each stage and related time-delay can be programmed to provide maximum
selectivity.
The IDMT stages have a selectable reset feature: DMT (0 to 600 s) or an IDMT timer
so as to reduce clearance times when intermittent faults occur.
The MiCOM P116 relays have separate instantaneous and delayed indications for
each stage and output relays and LEDs can be configured to indicate the faulted
phase(s).
Each protection stage can be disabled, configured to trip a circuit-breaker or to issue
an ALARM signal only.
Switch-on-to-Fault (based on 50/51)
The closing of a circuit breaker might inadvertently lead to a short-circuit fault due to
a maintenance ground clamp not yet removed. The P116 relays incorporate a
settable switch-on–to-fault protection function. It provides an instantaneous trip over
a settable time period after local or remote manual closure.
Inrush current in transformer applications can have an influence on the selectivity of
instantaneous trips; the short time-delay (DMT) can therefore be set for this
protection element in order to maintain selectivity and make it possible to have a
current threshold below any inrush current peak.
One independent DMT current stage is available for phase fault protection.
Autorecloser (79)
MiCOM P116 dual-powered relays incorporate a 4-shot autorecloser. All
programmed protection functions may independently start any of the shots and the
user can program which functions are allowed to trip after any of the shots.
To prevent an excessive number of reclosing cycles in a short period of time, a
setting can be used to define the maximum number of reclosing cycles allowed in a
period of time after the first one was detected.
Dead and reclaim times are freely adjustable.
Front panel LEDs can be configured to display the status of the autorecloser.
A counter stores the number of reclose commands. This information can be
displayed either locally or remotely.
The autorecloser can be enabled when the auxiliary power supply is present.
Inrush Blocking
The 2nd Harmonic Blocking detects high inrush current inflows that occur upon
connection of transformers or rotating machines. The function will block the phase
overcurrent, earth fault and negative sequence overcurrent elements (freely
selectable).
Timers AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4
Timers operate if the state of an input mapped to this function changes in such a way
that the function will be triggered. Timers can be used for CB tripping or alarm
signalling.
This function is available when inputs are energised via an auxiliary power supply.
78
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Protection functions
(cont.)
Blocking Logic
When MiCOM P116 relays are used in critical networks, the management of
protection relays must take surrounding devices into consideration. Any blocking
digital inputs can be independently configured to lock any combination of selected
elements (i.e. current stages, thermal replica, etc).
A typical application is to use a dedicated digital input to block the time-delayed
settings of phase/earth fault protection in a relay in response to the phase/earth fault
start condition of a downstream relay.
This function allows the MiCOM relays to clear the fault quickly and correctly when
used in a cascading scheme.
Selective Relay Scheme Logic
The P116 relays include selective relaying scheme logic.
A dedicated digital input can temporarily alter the time-delay settings in response to
the phase/earth fault start condition of a downstream relay.
Cold Load Pick-Up
Cold load pick-up temporarily raises the setting of selectable stages closer to the
load profile in order to avoid unwanted trips.
Time
DM101179EN
This function allows the MiCOM relays to quickly clear the fault when used in a
cascading scheme.
The setting value can be increased by 800% for example for a settable duration. To
trigger this function, the CB closed position or current criteria is used.
Output Relay Latching (86)
The RL2-RL6 output contacts may be latched freely.
Latching status information is stored so that even if the P116 does not have enough power
to trigger the output contacts (CT powering threshold: In = IA + IB + IC + IN < 0.65 In),
after the return of sufficient power the latched statuses of the LEDs and outputs are
recovered.
Nominal threshold
Current
Latched outputs can be reset via the activation of a logic input through the front
panel interface or by remote communication.
Instantaneous Information
Outputs and LEDs can be programmed with instantaneous information from freely
selectable protection elements: with or without latching.
Additionally, every start of a protection element is recorded in the event recorder and
the instantaneous recorder.
The instantaneous information is typically generated within 30 ms after the threshold
has been exceeded with a load current and/or auxiliary voltage applied.
In a switch-on-to-fault case without auxiliary voltage powering, this instantaneous
information is typically generated within 70 ms.
Trip Via Binary Input
Opto-isolated binary inputs are freely configured to timers AUX1 and/or AUX2.
This function works if inputs are triggered via the auxiliary voltage and when
sufficient power is applied to the relay.
Communication & Synchronization
The MiCOM P116 offers a wide range of communication protocols allowing its
utilization in most network control and data acquisition systems (via Modbus, IEC
60870-5-103). The protocol can be selected in the P116 menu.
It has been designed for permanent multi-drop connection through the rear RS485
communication port.
The MiCOM P116 incorporates an internal clock to allow 1 ms accuracy time tagging
of alarms, events, fault and disturbance records. To avoid any drifting of the
time-tagging clock, it’s necessary to periodically synchronize the relays. To do this
the P116 offers two solutions:
b Synchronization from the substation control system via the rear communication
port.
b Synchronization from an external clock via a dedicated digital input.
The back-up capacitor of the internal clock is charged from an auxiliary voltage
supply only and supports the internal clock typically up to three days.
NRJED112402EN
79
2
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Control & Monitoring
Two Setting Groups
External conditions may require the need for different settings or I/O configuration.
The MiCOM P116 provides two independent setting groups. The active setting group
can be switched from the local HMI or due to external conditions (digital input
change of state or DCS control).
The two setting groups include protection settings, binary inputs, outputs and LEDs
configuration.
Switching between setting groups is possible even while a protection function is
active (no time delay is lost). This allows this function to be used in advanced
applications where the specific parameters (including I/O) have to be changed
during certain processes.
2
Local/Remote Mode of CB Commands
The goal of this feature is to make it possible to block commands sent remotely
through communication networks (such as setting parameters, control commands,
etc.) in order to prevent any accidents or maloperation during maintenance work
performed on site.
The local mode can be set via the HMI, a digital input assigned to this feature or an
RS485.The Local/Remote mode state can be indicated via the HMI.
Circuit Breaker Command
Circuit breaker control is available from the front panel user interface, opticallyisolated inputs and remotely via substation communications. Circuit breaker control
is also possible via the function keys (Close/Open).
It is possible to send a local open/close command through the HMI upon operator
confirmation.
Trip Supervision
Trip circuit supervision in both circuit breaker open and closed states is possible
using the optically isolated-inputs included in the P116 scheme logic.
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
The circuit breaker condition monitoring features include:
b Monitoring the number of breaker trip operations
b Recording the sum of the broken current quantity I , (where x: 1 or 2)
b Monitoring the breaker operating time
An alarm signal is emitted if the above parameters exceed the settable threshold.
Event Recording
200 events are stored in the MiCOM P116 relays (even after a power supply loss).
Events include input/output state changes, alarms and contact operations.
To upload them, it is possible to use the front USB port (MiCOM S1) or the rear serial
port (DCS). Event records are stored in a non volatile FRAM memory. All events are
time-stamped to 1 ms.
Fault, Alarm & Instantanenous Recording
The last 20 faults, 5 alarms and 5 instantaneous records are stored inside the
MiCOM P116 relays.
Each fault includes:
b
b
b
b
b
b
Record number
Fault time
Active setting group
Faulted phase
Protection operation
Magnitude of input quantities.
Fault indication helps the user to clearly identify the fault and monitor the relay’s
settings and operations as all information is available on the relay HMI.
Fault records are stored in a non-volatile FRAM memory.
80
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Control & Monitoring
(cont.)
EM100049EN
Disturbance Recording
Up to 5 disturbance files are stored in the relay. Even if the total duration is set to 6 s,
it is fully adjustable for easy adaptation to customer requirements. They are stored in
COMTRADE format.
The disturbance recording function is triggered either by any of the programmed
thresholds, by an external input, or through the communications. All digital and
analog information is stored in non-volatile FRAM memory and can be transferred
using the front communication port or the rear port to be used by an external data
analyser. Disturbance records are stored in a non-volatile FRAM memory.
I/O Configuration
WaveWin – Data Analyzer Software
Every input and output can be freely configured to available functions (blocking of
protection element, reset LED or outputs, start, trip of every protection element, etc).
Any input and output can be assigned to any predefined function.
The P116 can be fitted with (ordering option):
b Universal binary inputs which have selectable options: AC only, DC only or AC/
DC energizing criteria with enhanced immunity to transients and disturbances, which
can appear in secondary wiring.
b DC inputs with a selectable operation threshold (110V DC / 127V DC / 220V DC).
Relay Maintenance Mode
The P116 incorporates direct control of the output relays (without the need to inject
any current). This functionality allows the user to quickly check the external wiring of
the relay’s output contacts.
EM100048EN
Support Software
MiCOM S1 Studio and MiCOM S1 (Windows compatible) support software is
available for the entire MiCOM family, including the P116 relays.
This Support Software is used to set all parameters in the P116 or download setting
parameters, fault and event records. Communication with a PC is managed by the
front USB port of the P116.
Self-Monitoring
Comprehensive self-monitoring procedures within the P116 ensure that internal
hardware or software errors are detected and do not cause malfunctions of the
device. When the auxiliary voltage is turned on, a functional test is carried out. Cyclic
self-monitoring tests are run during operation. Any deviations are stored in nonvolatile memory and determines whether protection is blocked or an alarm is raised.
The result of the fault diagnostics determines whether the protection unit will be
blocked or only an alarm will emitted.
MiCOM S1 Studio- Communication software
NRJED112402EN
81
2
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
Protection functions settings
Setting range
Function
min.
max.
Step
[37] Under Current G1/G2 (Model A)
2
I< ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching,Trip with Inhibition on 52A, Alarm with Inhibition on
52A
I<
0.1 In
2 In
0.01 In
tI<
0.05 s
200 s
0.01 s
[46] Negative sequence overcurrent G1/G2 (Model A)
I2> ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
I2>
0.1 In
Delay Type
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI,IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG, BPN
EDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve)
tI2>
0.05 s
200s
0.01s
I2> TMS
0.02
1.5
0.01
I2> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT (refer to Operation chapter)
DT I2> tReset
0.00 s
600 s
0.01 s
4 In
0.01 In
[46BC] Broken Conductor G1/G2 (Model A)
Broken Cond. ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrushblocking, Trip with Latching
Ratio I2/I1
20%
100%
1%
tBCond
0.05 s
600s
0.01s
0.1 In
1.00 In
0.01 Ien
Global settings/ O/C advanced
[46BC] Brkn.Cond I< Block.
[49] Thermal overload G1/G2
Therm. OL ?
Disabled, Enabled
Itherm
0.1 In
3.0 In
0.01In
Te (heating)
1 mn
200 mn
1mn
Tr (cooling)
1 mn
999 mn
1mn
Theta Trip
50%
200%
1%
Theta Reset Ratio
20%
99%
1%
Theta Alarm ?
Disabled, Enabled
Theta Alarm
20%
200%
1%
[50BF] Circuit breaker failure G1/G2
CB Fail ?
Disabled, Retrip, Alarm
CB Fail Time tBF
0.1 s
10 s
0.01 s
I< CBF
0.1 In
2 In
0.01 In
High sensitivity current setting
Cortec: P116A1N1Nxxxxxxx1x (1 A)or P116A1N4Nxxxxxxx1x (5 A)
IN< CBF
0.01 Ien
Medium sensitivity current setting
Cortec: P116A1N2Nxxxxxxx1x (1 A)or P116A1N5Nxxxxxxx1x (5 A)
IN< CBF
0.05 Ien
Low sensitivity current setting
Cortec: P116A1N3Nxxxxxxx1x (1 A)or P116A1N6Nxxxxxxx1x (5 A)
IN< CBF
0.1 Ien
Block I>?
No, Yes
Block IN>?
No, Yes
1.0 Ien
2 Ien
2 Ien
0.001 Ien
0.01 Ien
0.01 Ien
[50/51] SOTF (switch on to fault) G1/G2
SOTF ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
SOTF
1 In
40 In
0.01 In
tSOTF
0s
600 s
0.01 s
82
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Function
min.
max.
Step
[50/51] Phase overcurrent G1/G2
I> ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
I>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG,
BPNEDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve)
tI>
0.05 s
200 s
0.01 s
I> TMS
0.02
1.50
0.01
I> TD
0.02
100
0.01
I> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT (refer to Operation chapter)
DT I> tReset
0.00 s
600 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1
10
0.1
I>> ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
I>>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG,
BPNEDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve)
tI>>
0.05 s
200 s
0.01 s
I>> TMS
0.02
1.50
0.01
I>> TD
0.02
100
0.01
I>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT (refer to Operation chapter)
DT I>> tReset
0.00 s
600 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1
10
0.01
I>>> ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
I>>>
1 In
40 In
0.01 In
tI>>>
0s
200 s
0.01 s
3 In (IDMT) 40 In (DMT)
3 In (IDMT) 40 In (DMT)
0.01 In
2
0.01 In
[50/51N] Earth overcurrent G1/G2
High sensitivity current set
Cortec code P116A1N1Nxxxxxxx1x (1 A)
IN_1 (IN>)
0.002 Ien
0.1 Ien (IDMT)1.0 Ien (DMT)
0.001 Ien
IN_2 (IN>>)
0.025 Ien
1.0 Ien
0.001 Ien
IN_3 (IN>>>)
0.025 Ien
1.0 Ien
0.001 Ien
Medium sensitivity current set
Cortec code P116A1N2Nxxxxxxx1x (1A) or P116A1N5Nxxxxxxx1x (5A)
IN_1 (IN>)
0.01 Ien
b 0.4 Ien (IDMT)
IN_2 (IN>>)
0.2 Ien
8 Ien
0.01 Ien
IN_3 (IN>>>)
0.2 Ien
8 Ien
0.01 Ien
IN_1 stage ?
Disabled, IN> Trip, IN> Alarm, IN> Trip with Inrush blocking, IN> Trip with Latching
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI,IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG, BPN
EDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve))
tIN_1
0.05 s
200 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1 s
10 s
0.01 s
IN_1 TMS
0.02 s
1.5 s
0.01 s
IN_1 TD
0.02 s
100 s
0.01 s
IN_1 Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT (refer to Operation chapter)
DT IN_1 tReset
0.00 s
600 s
0.01 s
IN_2 stage ?
Disabled, IN>> Trip, IN>> Alarm, IN>> Trip with Inrush blocking, IN>> Trip with Latching
tIN>>
0s
IN_3 stage ?
Disabled, IN>>> Trip, IN>>> Alarm, IN>>> Trip with Inrush blocking, IN>>> Trip with Latching
tIN_3
0s
NRJED112402EN
200 s
200 s
b 8 Ien (DMT)
0.01 Ien
0.01 s
0.01 s
83
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Function
[79] Autoreclose
min.
max.
Step
G1/G2 (Model A)
Autoreclose ?
Disabled, Enabled
Dead time
2
tD1
0.01 s
600 s
0.01 s
tD2
0.01 s
600 s
0.01 s
tD3
0.1 s
600 s
0.01 s
tD4
0.1 s
600 s
0.01 s
0.02 s
600 s
0.01 s
Fast tripping shots
54321 (trip cycle)
Fast O/C Trip (I>, I>>, I>>>)
00000
Settings
b 0 - delay O/C protection element
b 1 - with Fast Trip delay
Fast O/C Trip Delay setting
0.00 s
9.99 s
Fast tripping shots
54321 (trip cycle)
Fast E/Gnd Trip (IN_1, IN_2, IN_3)
00000
Settings
b 0 – Time delay E/GND protection element
b 1 – with Fast Trip delay
Fast E/Gnd Trip Delay setting
0.00 s
9.99 s
Close Shot
4321 (close cycle)
Settings
tI>
0000
0 or 1
tI>>
0000
0 or 1
tI>>>
0000
0 or 1
tIN_1 (tIN>)
0000
0 or 1
tIN_2 (tIN>>)
0000
0 or 1
tIN_3 (tIN>>>)
0000
0 or 1
tAux1
0000
0 or 1
tAux2
0000
0 or 1
Inhibit Trip on [79] close shot
4 3 2 1 (close cycle)
Settings
Inhibit Trip tI> Shot:
0000
0 or 1
Inhibit Trip tI>> Shot:
0000
0 or 1
Inhibit Trip tI>>> Shot:
0000
0 or 1
Inhibit Trip tIN_1 (tIN>) Shot:
0000
0 or 1
Inhibit Trip tIN_2 (tIN>>) Shot:
0000
0 or 1
Inhibit Trip tIN_3 (tIN>>>) Shot:
0000
0 or 1
Inhibit Trip tAux1 Shot:
0000
0 or 1
Inhibit Trip tAux2 Shot:
0000
0 or 1
Reclaim time
Reclaim Time tR
Phase overcurrent
10 ms
Earth/Ground
10 ms
b Cycles:
0 = no action on auto-recloser: definitive trip
1 = trip on protection element pick-up, followed by a reclose cycle
b Inhibit Trip on Shot:
0 = no inhibit function
1 = auto-reclose without protection trip (trip command inhibited for protection element - no trip command from the auto-reclose function).
[79] Autoreclose Advanced Settings
CB Faulty Monitor.?
Yes or No
Block via Input ?
Yes or Yes + tI/52a or No
Start Dead t on
Protection Reset or CB trips
Rolling demand ?
Yes or No
Maximum cycle No. Rol. Demand
2
100
1
Time period Rol. Demand
1 mn
24 h
1 mn
Inhibit Time on Close tI
0.0 s
600 s
0.01 s
Signaling Reset
No or Close via 79
84
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Automation control functions settings
Setting range
Function
min.
max.
Step
Blocking Inrush
Blocking inrush
No, Yes, Closing
2nd Harmonic Ratio
10%
50%
1%
Inrush Reset Time
0s
200 s
10 ms
Unblock Inrush Time
0s
200 s
10 ms
Logic Selectivity
2
G1/G2 (Model A)
Logic selectivity 1 and logic selectivity 2: This function is used to assign a time-delay to the protection elements mapped to the “Log Sel” inputs.
The inputs can be mapped to the following protection elements: I>>, I>>>, IN_2 (IN>>), IN_3 (IN>>>).
Sel1?
Disabled or Enabled
t Sel1
0s
Sel2?
Disabled or Enabled
t Sel2
0s
Auxiliary timers
600 s
10 ms
600 s
10 ms
G1/G2 (Model A)
Aux1 ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching, Load Shedding (LS), AR after LS Hi (Hi state –
activates), AR after LS Lo(Lo state – activates)
Time-delay tAux1
0
Aux2 ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching, Load Shedding (LS), AR after LS Hi, AR after LS Lo
Time-delay tAux2
0
Aux3 ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching, Load Shedding (LS), AR after LS Hi, AR after LS Lo
Time-delay tAux3
0
Aux4 ?
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching, Load Shedding (LS), AR after LS Hi, AR after LS Lo
Time-delay tAux4
0
Cold Load PU
600 s
600 s
600 s
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
600 s
10 ms
G1/G2 (Model A)
Cold Load PU ?
Disabled or Current+Input or Input
Cold load PU Level
20%
999%
1%
Cold load PU tCL
0s
6000 s
100 ms
CLPU I>
Yes or No
CLPU I>>
Yes or No
CLPU I>>>
Yes or No
CLPU IN_1 (IN>)
Yes or No
CLPU IN_2 (IN>>)
Yes or No
CLPU IN_3 (IN>>>)
Yes or No
CLPU Brkn Cond
Yes or No
CLPU Itherm
Yes or No
CLPU I2>
Yes or No
CB Control Time
tOpen Pulse min
0.1 s
10 s
0.01 s
tClose Pulse (Model A)
0.1 s
10 s
0.01 s
Time-delay for Close (Model A)
0.0 s
200 s
0.01 s
1 mn
65000 mn
1 mn
200 s
1s
200 s
0.01 s
tP pulse (Model A)
CB Faulty External Monitoring (Model A)
TCB Faulty External Signal
1s
Remote Control Mode (Model A)
Remote CTRL Mode
b Remote only
b Remote + Local
Unblock SOTF Time (Model A)
52 Unblock SOTF Time
NRJED112402EN
0s
85
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Function
min.
Step
max.
TC Supervision (Model A)
TC Supervision ?
No or Yes or Yes - 52A
TC Supervision tSUP
0.1 s
10 s
0.01 s
CB Supervision (Model A)
2
CB Time Supervision?
Yes or No
Max CB Open time
0.01 s
10 s
0.01 s
Max CB Close time
0.01 s
10 s
0.01 s
CB Diagnostic ?
Yes or No
Max CB Open No.
1
50000
1
Max Sum Amps^n
0 MA
655.34 MA^n
0.1MA^n
AMPS’s n=
1
2
1
Pulse Time tCOM1
0
200s
10ms
Pulse Time tCOM2
0
200s
10ms
COM2 Order Conf.
RS485 or RS485+Button_C or Button_C
This configuration allows adding to Comm.Order 2: pressing of the ‘C’ clear key located on the front panel of P116.
Setting option: RS485+Button_C means that if command tCOM2 (Communication Order 2) via RS485 is executed or
‘C’ Clear key on the front panel is pressed, the output contact assigned to Comm.Order 2 will be energized via set
pulse time
Communication Orders (Model A)
Recording functions settings
Function
Setting range
Setting range
Function
Event Records
(Model L without Real Time Clock)
Alarm Recorder
(Model A)
Capacity
200 events
Capacity
5 alarm information
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Triggers
Any selected protection which is selected for signaling
only (set to Alarm)
Data
Date, hour, origin (any protection alarm)
b Any selected protection
Triggers
alarm and threshold
b Logic input change of state
b Logic output change of state
b Self test events
Fault Records
(Model L without Real Time Clock)
Disturbance Records
(Model L without Real Time Clock)
20 faults
Total record: max 6 s
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Triggers
Any selected protection alarm and threshold, logic
input, remotecommand
Triggers
Any selected protection which
trip CB
Data
b AC input channels
b Digital input and
b Output states frequency value
Capacity
Data
b Fault date Fault time
b Protection thresholds
b Active Setting Group
b Fault Origin
(faulty phase/earth)
b Fault measurements
Instantaneous Recorder
(available if Model A is powered from Vx only)
Setting range
Function
Default
value
Min.
Max.
Step
Pre-fault Time
0.1 s
0.1 s
2s
0.01 s
Post-fault Time
0.1 s
0.1 s
1s
0.01 s
Max Record
time
3 s
1.50 s
6s
0.01 s
Capacity
5 starting information
(instantaneous)
Disturb rec Trig
on Inst
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Trigger
Protection selected for tripping, Logic input assigned to ‘StartDistur.R.’
Triggers
Any selected protection which
trip CB
Data
Date, hour, origin (any
protection)
86
on Trip or on Inst.
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Base unit
PM103535
Presentation
User-Machine Interface (HMI)
All functions, including protection, automation, communication, LEDs, inputs and
outputs, can be programmed and modified using the front panel user interface
(Human Machine Interface).
Working language
The LCD informs the user about settings, measurements & faults with a pull-down
menu structure allowing easy and quick access to any data. The relay display
language can be changed in the menu system:
2
b English/German/French/Spanish/Portuguese/Russian/Turkish
Wiring
P116 basic Flush mounting cassette
Terminal block connections are made via screw terminals.
b AC Current Input Terminals
Threaded M4 screw-type plug-in terminals, ring type, with wire protection for
conductor cross-section
0.2 - 6mm single-core
0.2 - 4mm finely stranded
b General Input/Output Terminals
For power supply, binary inputs, contact output contacts and COM for rear
communications.
Threaded M3 screw-type plug-in terminals (MSTB 2.5/xx-ST-5.08)
0.2 - 4mm single-core
0.2 - 2.5mm finely stranded
Communication
b Communication software: MiCOM S1 Studio
Type Port
Physical Link
Connectors
Data Rate
Comms. mode
Protocol
RS485 signal levels,
two wire (Rear
communications
port)
Screened twisted pair
cable, distance to be
bridged: multi-endpoint
link: max. 100 m
Screws or
snap-on
b 4800 bauds or
b 9600 bauds or
b 38400 bauds or
b 57600bauds or
b 115200 bauds
b Data Bit: 8
b Stop bit: 1 or 2
b Parity:
‘No parity’ or
‘Odd parity’ or
‘Even parity’
b Address:
1 to 254 (default: 1)
b Modbus RTU,
b IEC60870-5-103
(selectable in menu)
(default:19.2 kbit/s)
USB
NRJED112402EN
USB2.0:
b minimum
1P*28AWG/2C*24AWG,
b max : 2m
PC: type A
male
P116: type mini
B 5-pin male
115 200 bauds (fixed)
b
b
b
b
Data Bit:8
Stop bit: 1
Parity: None
Address: 1
Isolation to SELV
level
b Modbus RTU
87
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Base unit
(cont.)
Dimensions & weight
Flush mounting case
157
DM101186EN
Case
103.6
Dimensions
184 mm
157 mm
b Depth
110 mm
MiCOM P116
Trip
Trip
Alarm
b approx. 3.1 kg
b with optional cassette: approx. 4.2 kg
168
Weight
184
2
b Height
b Width
C
OK
I
27
O
30
150
17
110
30
143
110
30
88
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Base unit
(cont.)
Front panel description
1
Green “Healthy” LED: Watchdog
2
Red “Trip” LED: Protection trip
3
Yellow “Alarm” LED: Alarm signaling
4
Up to five red programmable LEDs
1
5
16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal
display (LCD)
2
6
Clear key
7
3
Read key (jump to RECORDS column)
8
4 arrow keys, an enter key
5
7
PM103534
6
2
9
4
9 Electromechanical flag indicators
10 CB Close key (Model A)
11 CB Open key (Model A)
12 USB port for local connection
10
11
12
8
Rear panel description
Basic Flush Mounting Case
B
D
B
D
PM103537
A
A
Current ring terminal block A:
Current analogue inputs (phases
and earth)
B Terminal block B: Auxiliary voltage
Vaux and contact outputs
C
Terminal block C: Energy outputs
(sensitive trip coil, Flag indicator)
and RS485
D
D Terminal block D: Binary inputs
(Model A)
E
E Terminal block E: Contact outputs
(Model A)
PE PCT Protective (Earth) Conductor
terminal
NRJED112402EN
PE
89
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Base unit
(cont.)
External connection diagrams
DM101182EN
P2
P1
S2
S2
S2
B
S1
C
S1
A1
A2
A3
A4
2
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
MiCOM P116 (Model A):
Typical 3 phase CTs connection.
A10
P116
Ia
B1
B2
Ib
RL1
Ic
RL2
IN
IN
12-24Vdc/0.1J
D1
L1
Binary Input L4
D3
Binary Input L6
DM101181EN
Contact
Output
RL5
P2
Figure 2:
Note:
-
F+
-
F-
24Vdc/0.01J
D5
Contact
Output
RL3
Contact
Output
RL4
Low Energy
Trip Coil:
12-24Vdc/0.1J
or MiTOP
C1
C2
C3
Flag Indicator
24Vdc/0.01J
C4
L3
D6
RS485
D7
C9
C10
L4
TRS485
T+
USB
D9
L5
D10
D11
E5
L6
D12
RL6
Contact
Output
RL6
E6
E7
E8
E2
E3
RL5
E4
WD
P1
Typical Connection
to 3 Phase CTs
E9
Watchdog
E10
Ia
A
S2
S1
The current leads should
be connected exactly as shown in Figures:
B 2 to 5.
S2
S2
S2
S1
S1
C
S1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
P116
Ia
A8
MiCOM P116 (Model A):
A9
Typical 3 phase CTs + Core balanced CT connection.
A10
The P116 is not supplied via a core balance CT. An auxiliary
voltage source should be connected to terminals B1-B2 in
order to ensure that the P116 is supplied for earth fault currents
below 0.2 In.
B1
B2
Ib
RL1
Ic
RL2
IN
D1
D2
D3
Binary Input L2
D4
D5
Binary Input L3
D6
D7
Binary Input L4
D8
D9
Binary Input L5
D10
D11
Binary Input L6
D12
B11
L1
+
-
+
L2
-
B12
T+
TF+
F-
Figure 3:
E3
E4
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage Vx
C1
C2
C3
C4
Contact
Output
RL1
Contact
Output
RL2
Contact
Output
RL3
Contact
Output
RL4
Low Energy
Trip Coil:
12-24Vdc/0.1J
or MiTOP
Flag Indicator
24Vdc/0.01J
L3
RS485
C9
C10
L4
TRS485
T+
USB
L5
L6
E5
RL6
E6
Contact
Output
RL6
E7
E8
E2
Contact Output
RL5
B7
B10
RL4
A12
Binary Input L1
B6
B9
RL3
A11
Note: The current leads should be connected exactly as shown
in the figure.
B4
B8
IN
Ic
B3
B5
A7
90
Contact
Output
RL2
B7
B12
T-
+
L2
D8
Binary Input L5
B6
B11
T+
+
or
MiTOP
D4
Binary Input L3
Contact
Output
RL1
B4
B10
RL4
D2
Binary Input L2
B3
B9
RL3
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage Vx
B8
A12
Binary Input L1
Ic
B5
A11
Note: The current leads should be connected exactly as shown
in the figure.
Ia
A
S1
RL5
WD
E9
E10
Typical Connection to 3 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
Watchdog
P0938ENb
NRJED112402EN
The P116 is not supplied via a core balance CT.
In.
An auxiliary voltage source should be connected to terminals B1-B2 in order to
ensure that the P116 is supplied for earth fault currents below 0.2
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Base unit
(cont.)
DM101180EN
P2
P1
S2
S2
B
C
S2
S1
S1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
P116
Ia
A8
A9
MiCOM P116 (Model A):
A10
Typical 2 phase CTs + Core balanced CT connection.
A11
Ib
RL1
Ic
RL2
IN
D1
D2
D3
Note: The current leads should be connected exactly as shown
in the figure.
Binary Input L2
D4
D5
Binary Input L3
D6
D7
Binary Input L4
D8
D9
Binary Input L5
D10
D11
Binary Input L6
D12
Figure 4:
E3
E4
B6
B7
B9
RL3
B10
B11
RL4
L1
+
-
+
L2
-
B12
T+
TF+
F-
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage Vx
C1
C2
C3
C4
Contact
Output
RL1
2
Contact
Output
RL2
Contact
Output
RL3
Contact
Output
RL4
Low Energy
Trip Coil:
12-24Vdc/0.1J
or MiTOP
Flag Indicator
24Vdc/0.01J
L3
RS485
C9
C10
L4
TRS485
T+
USB
L5
L6
E5
RL6
E6
Contact
Output
RL6
E7
E8
E2
Contact Output
RL5
B4
B8
IN
Ic
B3
B5
A12
Binary Input L1
B1
B2
A7
The P116 is not supplied via a core balance CT. An auxiliary
voltage source should be connected to terminals B1-B2 in
order to ensure that the P116 is supplied for earth fault currents
below 0.2 In.
Ia
A
S1
RL5
WD
E9
Watchdog
E10
Typical Connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
The P116 is not supplied via a core balance CT.
An auxiliary voltage source should be connected to terminals B1-B2 in order to
ensure that the P116 is supplied for earth fault currents below 0.2 In.
Refer to Application chapter: P116/EN AP.
NRJED112402EN
91
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Base unit
(cont.)
DM101187EN
Application connection diagrams
MiCOM P116
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
A
B
C
ac Auxiliary
Voltage
B1
#
A1 Measuring
C2
IB
A4
C1
+
Power
Supply
A3 Measuring
C3
+
A5 Measuring
C4
IC
A6
Power
Supply
IN
A7
Measuring
A8
Output contacts
B4
Trip
RL1
A10
MiCOM P116 Model A powered by a WA 25 O:
4
Connection example for a P116 Model A powered by a WA 25
O and with a 2-pole connection (A-C)
Measuring
WF
WA
6
B9
WD
D2
WB
WC
D3
Binary
L1 inputs
b1
14
b2
E3
Trip
E6
L4
D8
E5
RL6
E10
L5
D10
D11
E9
WD
L6
D12
E2
E7
D7
D9
WA 25 O
B11
B12
RL5
L3
D6
13
B10
RL4
D5
9
RL3
L2
D4
b2
B6
7
WE
12
B8
RL2
D1
11
B7
3
5
B5
B3
A9
1
C9
C10
Energy outputs
IA
A2
2
+
#
B2
Analogue inputs
Trip
element
0.5 (1) A
Communication
port RS485
E8
Hardware configuration of WA 25
for Trip element 0.5A or 1A
11
12
13
14
b2
b2
Trip element: 1 A
11
12
13
14
DM101188EN
b1
Trip element: 0.5 A
MiCOM P116
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
A
B
C
ac Auxiliary
Voltage
B1
#
A1 Measuring
A2
C1
+
Power
Supply
C2
IB
C3
+
A5 Measuring
A6
A7
A8
C4
IC
Power
Supply
IN
Measuring
Output contacts
B4
RL1
Trip
1
MiCOM P116 Model A powered by a WA 25 O:
Connection example for a P116 Model A powered by a WA 25
O and with a 3-pole connection (A-B-C)
4
B7
6
WF
WA
B9
WD
D2
WB
WC
D3
D4
Binary
L1 inputs
D6
13
b1
14
b2
B11
D10
RL5
E2
E6
RL6
L5
L6
Trip
E7
L4
D11
D12
B12
E3
L3
D7
D8
B10
RL4
D9
WA 25 O
RL3
L2
D5
9
b2
B6
7
WE
12
B8
RL2
D1
11
Measuring
3
5
B5
B3
A9
A10
C9
C10
Energy outputs
IA
A3 Measuring
A4
+
#
Analogue inputs
Trip
element
0.5 (1) A
Communication
port RS485
B2
WD
E5
E10
E9
E8
Hardware configuration of WA 25
for Trip element 0.5A or 1A
11
12
13
14
b2
b2
Trip element: 1 A
11
12
13
14
b1
Trip element: 0.5 A
92
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Base unit
DM101189EN
(cont.)
MiCOM P116
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
A
B
C
ac Auxiliary
Voltage
B1
#
A1 Measuring
A2
C1
+
Power
Supply
C2
IB
A7
A8
C4
IC
Power
Supply
IN
Measuring
Output contacts
B4
RL1
Trip
MiCOM P116 Model A powered by a WA 25 O::
Connection example for a P116 powered by a WA 25 O
and with a 4-pole connection (A-B-C-N)
4
A10
3
5
6
WF
WE
WD
WB
WC
b2
Binary
L1 inputs
B6
D6
13
14
b2
B11
D10
RL5
E2
E6
RL6
L5
L6
Trip
E7
L4
D11
D12
B12
E3
L3
D7
D8
B10
L2
D9
WA 25 O
RL3
RL4
D3
D5
b1
B8
B9
D2
9
12
B7
7
D4
11
Measuring
RL2
D1
WA
B5
B3
A9
1
2
C3
+
A5 Measuring
A6
C9
C10
Energy outputs
IA
A3 Measuring
A4
+
#
B2
Analogue inputs
Trip
element
0.5 (1) A
Communication
port RS485
WD
E5
E10
E9
E8
Hardware configuration of WA 25
for Trip element 0.5A or 1A
11
12
13
14
b2
b2
Trip element: 1 A
11
12
13
14
b1
Trip element: 0.5 A
NRJED112402EN
93
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM P116
Base unit
DM101183EN
(cont.)
A
B
C
MiCOM P116 Model A
Auxiliary voltage
(ac or dc)
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
B1
Optional connection
Tripping coil
220Vdc
+
#
B2
#
Analogue inputs
A1 Measuring
C2
IB
A4
C1
+
Power
Supply
A3 Measuring
C3
+
A5 Measuring
MiCOM P116 Model A powered by an E124::
A9
Connection example for a P116 powered by an E124 and with
a 4-pole connection (A-B-C-N).
A10
Capacitor
Trip Unit
MiCOM E 124
The earth input supplies the relay.
Measuring
10
11
VD-
6
B4
Trip
RL1
B5
B3
B7
B8
RL2
B6
B9
D1
Binary
L1 inputs
VD+
D5
2
D6
RL3
B10
B11
RL4
D3
B12
L2
D4
AUX1 AUX2
Output contacts
Measuring
D2
Up to 300 Vdc / 59 J
Power
Supply
IN
A7
A8
C4
IC
A6
E3
Trip
RL5
L3
E2
E7
D7
E6
L4
D8
E10
L5
D10
D11
E9
WD
L6
D12
DM101184EN
E5
RL6
D9
Figure 5:
E8
Connection example for a P116 powered by an E124 and with a 4-pole
connection (A-B-C-N)
The earth
chapter:
MiCOM
P116P116/EN AP).
A input supplies the relay (refer to Application
Auxiliary voltage
(ac or dc)
B
C
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
B1
Optional connection
Tripping coil
220Vdc
Communication
port RS485
#
Analogue inputs
A1 Measuring
C1
+
Power
Supply
C2
IB
C3
+
A5 Measuring
A6
A7
A8
C4
IC
Power
Supply
IN
Measuring
Output contacts
B4
RL1
Trip
A10
Measuring
B7
B8
RL2
Connection example for a P116 powered by an E124 and with
a 4-pole connection (A-B-C-N).
Capacitor
Trip Unit
MiCOM E 124
The P116 is not supplied via the earth input.
Up to 300 Vdc / 59 J
10
11
D2
Binary
VD+
D5
6
2
D6
D8
B11
RL4
E3
L3
RL5
E2
E6
RL6
L5
L6
Trip
E7
L4
D11
D12
B12
L2
D9
D10
B10
L1 inputs
D3
VD-
RL3
D7
Figure 6:
B6
B9
D1
D4
AUX1 AUX2
B5
B3
A9
MiCOM P116 powered by an E124:
C9
C10
Energy outputs
IA
A3 Measuring
A4
+
#
B2
A2
94
C9
C10
Energy outputs
IA
A2
2
Communication
port RS485
WD
E5
E10
E9
E8
Connection example for a P116 powered by an E124 and with a 4-pole
NRJED112402EN
connection (A-B-C-N)
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Base unit
DM103436EN
(cont.)
P2
P1
S2
S2
S2
B
S1
S1
Ia
A
S1
A1
A2
A3
A4
MiCOM P116 (Model L):
A5
Typical 3 phase CTs connection.
A6
Note: The current leads should be connected exactly as shown
in the figure.
A7
A8
A9
A10
C
P116
Ia
Ic
Ib
B1
B2
Ib
RL1
Contact
Output RL1
B5
Ic
WD
IN
2
B3
B4
B6
B7
Watchdog
B8
B9
IN
B10
Model L
B11
B12
T+
12-24Vdc/0.1J
+
-
T-
or
MiTOP
DM103435EN
P2
S2
S2
S2
S1
C4
P1
B
S1
S1
A1
A3
Typical 3 phase CTs connection + Core balanced CT
connection.
Note: The current leads should be connected exactly as shown
in the figure.
Ia
A
S1
A2
MiCOM P116 (Model L):
Energy Trip
C3
USB
S2
C1
C2
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
Ia
C
P116
Ic
Ib
B1
B2
Ib
RL1
B3
B4
B5
Ic
WD
IN
Contact
Output RL1
B6
B7
Watchdog
B8
B9
IN
B10
Model L
B11
B12
12-24Vdc/0.1J
+
or MiTOP
USB
NRJED112402EN
T+
T-
C1
C2
Energy Trip
C3
C4
95
MiCOM P116
MiCOM series 10
Base unit
(cont.)
DM103434EN
P2
S2
S2
S2
S1
P1
S1
B
A1
A2
2
A3
A4
MiCOM P116 (Model L):
Typical 2 phase CTs connection + Core balanced CT
connection.
Note: The current leads should be connected exactly as shown
in the figure.
Ia
A
S1
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
Ia
C
P116
Ic
Ib
B1
B2
Ib
RL1
B3
B4
B5
Ic
WD
IN
Contact
Output RL1
B6
B7
Watchdog
B8
B9
IN
B10
Model L
B11
B12
12-24Vdc/0.1J
+
or MiTOP
USB
96
T+
T-
C1
C2
Energy Trip
C3
C4
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
2
NRJED112402EN
97
TOOLS
This international site allows you
to access all the Schneider Electric
products in just 2 clicks
via comprehensive range datasheets, with direct links to:
ppcomplete library: technical
documents, catalogs, FAQs,
brochures…
pp selection guides from
the e-catalog.
ppproduct discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also find illustrated
overviews, news to which you can
subscribe, the list of country contacts
This animated tool helps you to select
the best Automation Intelligent
Electronic Device adapted to your
need. This CD includes description
of all Schneider Electric IEDs ranges
(Sepam, MiCOM, VAMP, Easergy).
This selector is also included in the
Schneider Electric web site.
DM101166EN
Automation panorama
Energy Automation
Panorama 2012
Ene
Pan rgy A
o ra u t o m
ma
a
201 tion
2
PE88096
3
schneider-electric.com
98
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM series 20
Range description
5
MiCOM series 10
25
MiCOM series 20
99
Selection table
Sensor inputs 101
102
Setting Software Accessories 103
103
Environmental characteristics
104
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
106
Numerical three phase and earth fault overcurrent
relay description106
Ratings
107
Protection functions109
Control & Monitoring114
Setting ranges115
Base unit127
Presentation127
Dimensions & weight
128
Description  
129
Connection diagrams
130
MiCOM P220 / P225
132
Numerical CT and auxiliary voltage powered overcurrent
relay descrition
Ratings
132
133
Protection functions135
Control & Monitoring139
Setting ranges142
Base unit146
Presentation146
Dimensions & weight
147
Description  
148
Connection diagrams
149
MiCOM P521
Numerical CT and Vx auxiliary voltage-powered
overcurrent relay description
150
Ratings
152
150
Protection functions153
Control & Monitoring158
Setting ranges161
Base unit165
Presentation165
Dimensions & weight
166
Description  
167
Connection diagrams
168
NRJED112402EN
99
3
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Numerical CT and Vx auxiliary voltage-powered
overcurrent relay description
Ratings
170
170
171
Protection functions172
Control & Monitoring176
Setting ranges178
Base unit182
Presentation182
Dimensions & weight
183
Description  
184
Connection diagrams
185
Order form
187
3
100
NRJED112402EN
Selection table
MiCOM series 20
Overcurrent
P122
P123
P127
Line
Diff.
Motor
(Feeder, Incomer,
Transformer or Generator)
Protection
ANSI
Speed switch inputs
12/14
P220
P225
Optional RTD
38/49T
Phase under/over voltage (AND & OR mode)
27/59
Positive sequence under voltage
27D
Re-acceleration autorisation
27LV
Wattmetric Earth Fault
32N/67W
Undercurrent / Loss of load
37



Broken conductor detection
46BC



Negative phase sequence overcurrent
46



Negative sequence overvoltage
47
Start / Stalled Protection / Motor Re-Acceleration
48/ 51LR


Thermal overload
49






Circuit breaker failure
50BF








6
10

P521















Locked Rotor during Start-up
51S


Voltage controlled overcurrent
51V

Residual over voltage / Derived Vo sequence
overvoltage
59N

High impedance restricted earth fault
64N
Autoreclose
79
Under/over frequency
81U/O
Rate of change of Frequency (df/dt+t)
81R
Output relay latching
86
Phase segregated current differential protection
87P
Current transformer supervision
CTS
Circuit breaker fail protection
CBF
CB commande (local Open / Close)


3

































CLPU



Trip Circuit Supervision
TCS



Voltage transformer supervision
VTS/ 60
Switch on to fault
SOTF











P122
P123
P127



Boolean logic equation
8
8
8
AND / OR and NOT gates

Emergency Restart
Selective relay scheme logic


Cold load pick-up
Control & Monitoring




67P




3 phase directional overcurrent



50 / 51
66
P923

50N / 51N
67N
P922

3-Phase overcurrent
Number of Starts Limitation
P921

Earth overcurrent / Sensitive earth fault
Earth fault directional overcurrent
Voltage &
Frequency (Busbar)
CB Control & Monitoring (Local/ remote)
P220
P225
P521
P921
P922
P923



8





8
8
8
8
8











Setting Groups
2
2
8
2
2
2
Auxiliary timers
3
5
7/12*
10
10
5
1




2
2
5
5
* (option)
NRJED112402EN
101
MiCOM series 20
Selection table
(cont.)
Overcurrent
(Feeder, Incomer,
Transformer or Generator)
Measurement & records
Measurements
Motor
Line
Diff.
Voltage &
Frequency (Busbar)
P122
P123
P127
P220
P225
P521
P921
P922
P923












Power and Energy Measurements

Hours Run



CB Operations






Disturbance Records up to number x 2.5 sec (backed-up)
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Fault Records (backed-up)
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
Event Logging (backed-up)
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
Front port (RS232)









Rear port (RS485)


 / 2*






Modbus RTU









IEC 60870-5-103


*






Digital inputs
3
5
7 / 12*
6
6
5
2
5
5
Outputs relays
6
8
8
6
6
8
4
8
8
4 fixed function LEDs and 4 programmable LEDs









1/5 dual rated AC Current inputs (settable)






4
4
4
P921
P922
P923





Phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltage protection



Settable hysteresis


Communication
3
Rear Port Communication Protocol
Hardware
57….130 V AC Voltage inputs
General functions
3
1
P122
P123
P127
Test of output relays (Maintenance)



P220
P225
P521
Inrush blocking/ restraint (menu selectable)




Blocking logic




Phase rotation




Intertripping (Direct, Permissive and Current differential)

Propagation delay compensation

3 Pole tripping only

Fibre optic or metallic signalling channels

Supervision of protection signalling channel

Interchangeable protection signalling interface

Vector Compensation (all vector groups)

Ratio Correction

Delta U / Delta T
Under voltage Blocking (settable for P923)
Time synchronisation (via digital input)





Time synchronisation (Modulated and Demodulated IRIG-B)





Anti back-spin



* (option)
Sensor inputs
P122
P123
P127
P220
P225
P521
P921
P922
P923
Each MiCOM series 20 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement sensors required for the application.
CT Inputs
4
4
4
4
4
4
-
-
-
VT inputs
-
-
3
-
1
-
4
4
4
102
NRJED112402EN
Setting software
MiCOM series 20
EM100050EN
Accessories
MiCOM S1 Studio
All available functions, including protection, automation, communication, leds, inputs
and outputs, are easily programmable through the user-freindly human machine
interface and/or the MiCOM S1 Studio sofware.
Simple function selection by mouseclick with MiCOM S1 Studio
3
PM103543
Battery box MiCOM E2
Due to the lack of an RS232 communication port on modern PCs, the MiCOM E2
USB/RS232 cable is a must for all MiCOM relays users.
The MiCOM E2 performs the two following functions:
b Power MiCOM series 20 relays from the RS232 front port
□ When relays are not yet powered up before commissioning
To MiCOM
EIA(RS)232
front port
□ When the auxiliary power supply of the relay is off or has failed
□ When no appropriate power supply is available (demonstration, exhibition ...)
DM101213EN
b Access any MiCOM relays with MiCOM S1 Studio through the PC USB port
(retrieve events/disturbance, remote measurements access, download/upload
settings files/PSL ...)
Laptop
RS232/RS232 cable
Battery
9 pin front port
Serial communication port (COM1 or COM2)
Serial data connector (up to 15 m)
DCE
Pin 2 Tx
Pin 3 Rx
Pin 5 0V
Serial data connector
An RS232 cable can also be used to communicate to the relay. The RS232 cable
allows the user to be able to read and change the settings or retrieve records and
disturbance files of the relay when it is not powered by its auxiliary source.
DTE
Pin 2 Rx
Pin 3 Tx
Pin 5 0V
PC connection shown assuming 9 way serial port
NRJED112402EN
103
MiCOM series 20
Environmental characteristics
Insulation withstand
Insulation
Standard
Value
b IEC 60255-5: 2000
2 kVrms 1 minute to earth and between
independent circuits.
b IEEE C39.90:1989
1.5kV rms AC for 1 minute, (reaffirmed 1994)
across normally open contacts
Impulse voltage
IEC 60255-5: 2000
5 kVp Between all terminals & all terminals and
case earth
Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5: 2000
> 1000 M at 500 Vdc
Dielectric withstand
Electrical environment
Insulation
3
High frequency disturbance
Standard
Value
IEC 60255-22-1:1998
Class 3
b 2.5 kV common mode
b 1 kV differential mode
Class A
IEC 60255-22-4:2002
Fast transient
b 2 kV 5kHz terminal block comms
b 4 kV 2.5kHz all circuits excluding comms
EN 61000-4-4:1995 Level 4
b 2 kV 5kHz all circuits excluding power supply
b 4 kV 5kHz power supply
Electrostatic discharge
b EN 61000-4-2:1995
b IEC60255-22-2:1996
Class 4
b 8 kV contact discharge
b 15kV air discharge
Surge Immunity
b EN 61000-4-5:1995
b IEC 60255-22-5:2002
Level 4
b 4kV common mode,
b 2kV differential mode
Conducted emissions
b EN55022:1998
b IEC 60255-25:2000
b 0.15-0.5MHz, 79dBμV (quasi peak)
b 66 dBμV (average)
b 0.5-30MHz, 73dBμV (quasi peak)
b 60 dBμV (average)
Radiated emissions
b EN55022:1998
b IEC 60255-25:2000
b 30-230MHz, 40dBμV/m at 10m measurement
distance
b 230-1GHz, 47dBμV/m at 10m measurement
distance
Conducted immunity
b EN 61000-4-6:1996
b IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Level 3
b 10V rms @ 1kHz 80% am, 150kHz to 80MHz
Radiated Immunity
b EN 61000-4-3:2002
b IEC 60255-22-3:2000
Level 3,
b 10V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am
EN 61000-4-3:2002
b 30V/m 800MHz to 960MHz and 1.4GHz to 2GHz
Radiated Immunity from digital telephones
Magnetic field immunity
Level 4
@ 1kHz 80% am
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2:2004
b 2kV differential mode, level 4 35V/m 80MHz to
1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am
b 35V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 100% pulse
modulated front face only
EN 61000-4-8:1994
Level 5,
b 2kV differential mode, level 4 100A/m applied
continuously, 1000A/m for 3s
EN 61000-4-9:1993
Level 5
b 1000A/m
EN 61000-4-10:1993
Level 5
b 100A/m at 100kHz and 1MHz
Applied common and transverse mode
ANSI Surge withstand capability
104
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1:2002
b 4kV fast transient
b 2.5kV damped oscillatory
NRJED112402EN
Environmental characteristics
MiCOM series 20
(cont.)
Environment
Insulation
Temperature
Standard
Value
IEC 60255-6
Ambient temperature range
Tested as per:
b Operating temperature range
b IEC 60068-2-1: 2007
–25°C to +55°C (or –13°F to +131°F)
–25°C (–13°F) storage (96 hours)
–40°C (–40°F) operation (96 hours)
b IEC 60068-2-2: 2007
b Storage and transit
+85°C (+185°F) (storage (96 hours)
–25°C to +70°C (or –13°F to +158°F)*
+85°C (+185°F) operation (96 hours)
(*) The upper limit is permissible for a Single 6 hour duration within any 24 hour period.
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-78:2001
56 days at 93% RH and 40 °C
Enclosure protection
IEC 60-529: 2001
b IP 52 Protection (front panel) against dust and
dripping water
b IP 50 Protection for the rear and sides of the
case against dust
b IP 10 Product safety protection for the rear due to
live connections on the terminal block
Sinusoidal Vibrations
IEC 60255-21-1:1998
Response and endurance, class 2
Shocks
IEC 60255-21-2:1998
Response and withstand, class 1 & 2
Bump
IEC 60255-21-2:1998
Response and withstand, class 1
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3:1998
Class 2
Creepage distances and clearances
IEC 60255-27: 2005
Pollution degree 2, Overvoltage category III,
Impulse test voltage 5 kV
Corrosive Environments
Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test
Ke, Method (class) 3
Industrial corrosive environment / poor
environmental control, mixed gas flow test.
b 21 days at 75% relative humidity and +30°C
b Exposure to elevated concentrations of
,
,
and
.
EU directive
EMC Directives
Standard
EMC Compliance
Compliance with the European Commission's EMC Directive
89/336/EEC
93/31/EEC
Compliance with the European Commission's Low Voltage Directive.
Product Safety
2006/95/EC
(replacing 73/23/EEC from 01/2007)
NRJED112402EN
Generic standards were used to establish conformity:
b EN50081-2: 1994
b EN60952-2: 1995
Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards :
b EN61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995
b EN60950: 1992/A11: 1997
105
3
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Three phase and earth fault overcurrent
relays description
PM103540
The MiCOM P122 / P123 non-directional relays range up to the multifunction three
phase and earth fault P123.
The MiCOM P127 directional relay ranges up to the multifunction three phase and
earth fault, complete of voltage and frequency protection functions.
Users particularly appreciate the friendliness of the Human Machine Interface and
the easy setting of the relays (that can be fully set through the front HMI or using
MiCOM S1 Studio setting software).
PM103541
In addition to their protection functions, MiCOM P122/P123/P127 provide full
measurement and monitoring information necessary for efficient maintenance and
post-fault analysis.
Several communication protocols allow easy interfacing of the relays in most of
substation control or SCADA systems.
The MiCOM P122/P123/P127 are housed in the same draw out 4U metal case for
panel or rack mounting with 20TE width (P122 and P123) or 30TE width (P127).
Application
MiCOM P122/P123/P127 relays provide a wide range of protection functions
allowing their use in several applications:
3
b Main or backup protection on MV&HV systems
b Overhead lines and underground cables as a backup on HV systems
b Neutral systems protection (Insolated, solid earthed, resistance earthed and
Petersen coil earthed)
b MV subscribers, Industry, Transport
The MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127 relays provide
features for easy adaptation and are suitable
for all applications where overcurrent and
earth-fault protection are required
b Generator and transformer scheme
b High impedance scheme for busbar and machine protection
Overview
The following functions are available in most of the devices:
b Measurement and metering
b Dynamic average values, max peak value and rolling demand for the current
measurements
b Disturbance recording including all the CT/VT inputs and logic status
Customer benefits
b Fault recording
b Integration of function leading to cost-effective
solution
b Event recording
bUser friendly Human Machine Interface
Main functions
b Highly flexible overcurrent relay with Boolean
logic equation
The MiCOM P122/P123/P127 protection relays are comprised of full suite of
protection functions as well as automatic recloser and auxiliaries.
b Multi-shot Autoreclose
All available functions, including protection, automation, communication, leds, inputs
and outputs, are easily programmable through the user-friendly human machine
interface and/or the MiCOM S1 Studio software interface.
b One single configuration software
MiCOM S1 Studio
EM100050EN
b Full set of measurement, metering & recording
Simple function
selection by
mouseclick
with MiCOM
S1 Studio
106
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Ratings
Power Supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx
24 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac
Operating range
DC: ± 20% of Vx AC: – 20%, +10% of Vx
Residual ripple
Up to 12%
Stored energy time
≥50 ms for interruption of Vx
Burden
Stand by: <3W DC or <8VA AC
Frequency
Frequency protection functions
From 45 to 65Hz
Nominal frequency
50/60Hz
Current inputs (AC inputs)
Phase current inputs
1 and 5A by connection
Earth current inputs
1 and 5A by connection
Operating range
Burden Phase Current
Burden Earth Current
Thermal withstand
Rrp
(Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In)
Rrn
(Impedance of relay neutral current input at 30In)
Selection by ordering code (Cortec)
3
b < 0.025VA (1A)
b < 0.3VA (5A)
b < 0.08VA (1A)
b < 0.42VA (5A)
b 1s @ 100 x rated current
b 2s @ 40 x rated current
b continuous @ 4 x rated current
P127 only
b 25 m (1A input)
b 8 m (5A input)
b 87 m
b 15 m
(1A input)
(5A input)
Logic inputs
Logic input burden
< 10 mAmps per input
Logic input recognition time
< 5ms
Output relay characteristic
Contact rating
Contact relay
Dry contact Ag Ni
Make current
Max. 30A and carrry for 3s
Carry capacity
5A continuous
Rated Voltage
250Vac
Breaking characteristic
Breaking capacity AC
Breaking capacity DC
Operation time
b 1500 VA resistive
b 1500 VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5)
b 220 Vac, 5A (cos = 0.6)
b 135 Vdc, 0.3A (L/R = 30 ms)
b 250 Vdc, 50W resistive or 25W inductive (L/R=40ms)
<7ms
Durability
Loaded contact
10000 operation minimum
Unloaded contact
100000 operation minimum
NRJED112402EN
107
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Ratings
(cont.)
Voltage inputs (P127 only)
Voltage input range Un
Operating range (measuring range)
b 57 to 130V b 220 to 480V b 0 to 260V
b 0 to 960V
Resistive 44 k
Burden
Resistive 438 k
Continuous
Thermal Withstand
10 seconds
b 0.074W / 57V
b 0.38W / 130V
b 1.54W / 260V
b 0.1102W / 220V
b 0.525W / 480V
b 2.1W / 960V
b 260V ph-ph
b 960V ph-ph
b 300V ph-ph
b 1300V ph-ph
3
108
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
Functional overview
DM101197EN
(Description of ANSI code nos., see Protection Function Overview table below)
Rear
Port 1
Front port
Setting
Software S1
27
Protection
CTs
67
59
67 N
Rear
Port 2
RS485 port nbr.2
To setting software S1
RS485 port nbr.1
To setting software S1
to SCADA system
59 N
32N
Iecos
32
81U/O
50/51
81R
50 N
51 N
37
79
46
86
46BC
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
MEASUREMENTS
b SOTF (Switch on to fault)
b CB local/Remote
b Phase Current Rotation
b CB Monitoring
b Cold Load Pick Up
b VTS
b Trip Circuit Supervision
b Blocking Logic
b Selective Scheme Logic
b Relay maintenance Mode
b Remote ctrl on output relays
b Auxiliary timers
b Peak and rolling demand
b Self Diagnostic
b IRIG-B synchronization
b Phase current
49
RECORDING
FEATURES
b Direct and Inverse currents
b Residual current
Fault record
25
b Residual voltage
b Line and Phase voltage
b Active and Reactive Power
b Apparent Power & Energy
b Autoreclose counters
b CB mechanical operation
counter
Event Recording
250
Flexible
Disturbance
Recording
b CB electrical operation
counter
BOOLEAN LOGIC EQUATION
• 8 independents equations
• AND, NOT & OR gates
• 16 parameters in each equation
• Result on leds & outputs
• Possibility to inhibit alarm
50BF
Directional overcurrent relay MicOM P127
Standard
ANSI codes
Features
27/59
Phase under/over voltage (AND & OR mode)
32N/67W
Wattmetric Earth Fault
37
46BC
46
P122
Option
P123
P127
b
b
Undercurrent / Loss of load
b
b
b
Broken conductor detection
b
b
b
Negative phase sequence overcurrent
b
b
b
b
47
Negative sequence overvoltage
49
Thermal overload
b
b
b
Earth overcurrent / Sensitive earth fault
b
b
b
3 Phase overcurrent
b
b
b
Circuit breaker failure
b
b
50N/51N
50/51
50BF
51V
Voltage controlled overcurrent
59N
Residual over voltage / Derived Vo sequence overvoltage
64N
High impedance restricted earth fault
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
67N
Earth fault directional overcurrent
67P
3 phase directional overcurrent
79
Autoreclose
81U/O
Under/over frequency
81R
Rate of change of Frequency (df/dt+t)
86
Output relay latching
b
b
b
CBF
Circuit breaker fail protection
b
b
b
CB commande (local Open / Close)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
CTS/VTS
Current transformer supervision / VT supervision
SOTF
Switch on to fault
b
b
TCS
Trip Circuit Supervision
b
b
b
CLPU
Cold load pick-up
b
b
b
Inrush blocking
b
b
b
Test of output relays (Maintenance)
b
b
b
Selective relay scheme logic
b
b
b
Phase rotation
b
b
b
NRJED112402EN
109
3
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
(cont.)
P122
P123
P127
Number of digital inputs
3
5
7/12*
Total number of outputs relays
6
8
8
Events recording
250
250
250
Fault recording
25
25
25
Disturbance recording
5
5
5
Setting group
2
2
8
Auxiliary timers
3
5
7/12*
1
1
1/2*



General Features
Number of RS485 port
Communication
Time synchronisation
IEC60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU (port #1)
Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 (port # 2)
v
Via rear communication port (DCS)



Via digital input (external clock)



Modulated and demodulated IRIG-B
3
v
Settings software
MiCOM S1 Studio using RS232 front port



Boolean logic equation
AND, OR and NOT gates (8 equations)



RMS currents values & frequency



Peak and rolling currents values



Max and average measurements values


Measurements
Phase and/or neutral angle


Power and Energy

Keys (v) (*) : optional
Three-Phase Overcurrent (50/51) & Earth Overcurrent
(50N/51N)
Three independent stages are available either for phase and earth fault protection.
For the first and second stage the user may independently select definite time delay
(DTOC) or inverse time delay (IDMT) with different type of curves (IEC, IEEE/ANSI,
RI, RECT, EDF BPN). The third stage can be configured for peak detection and with
definite time only. Each stage and related time delay can be programmed to provide
maximum selectivity. The IDMT stages have reset definite or IDMT timer to reduce
clearance times when intermittent faults occur.
A fourth earth overcurrent threshold based on derived earth current calculation is
available on MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 (when no earth CT is available).
The MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays have separate instantaneous and delayed
information for each stage. MiCOM P123 & P127 can indicate the phase(s) in fault
by configuring output relays (first stage only)
Three-Phase & Earth-Fault Directional Overcurrent (67/67N)
Each of the three-phase overcurrent stages of P127 & earth fault stages of P127 can
be independently configured as directional protection and with specific characteristic
angle (RCA) and boundaries. The phase fault directional elements are internally
polarised by quadrature phase to phase voltages. A synchronous polarising function
is provided to ensure a correct operation of the overcurrent elements for close-up
three phase faults where the collapse of the polarising line voltages occurs. In
addition to the residual current, the residual voltage must be connected to a
dedicated input or internally calculated as vector sum (P127 only) in order to make
possible the directional operation of the earth-fault. Each earth-fault directional stage
measures the residual current, the residual voltage, and the angle between residual
voltage and current.
110
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
(cont.)
DM101185EN
Thermal Overload (49)
Transformers and cables must be protected taking into account of their particular
thermal characteristics. MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays include a thermal
replica element based on the true RMS value of the current, up to 10th harmonic.
Alarm and overload thresholds and time constant are fully programmable to match
each application requirement.
Time
I th
I>
t>
High Impedance Restricted Earth-Fault (64N)
MiCOM P12x range offer the REF feature applied to enhanced ground fault
detection on each transformer winding.
I>>
t>>
I>>>
I<
The relays ensure a high degree of stability against external fault conditions and a
reliable performance against internal faults.
t>>>
All the 50N/51N stages can be used for this application.
Current
Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46)
The MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays include a programmable function specially
designed to detect unbalanced load or fault conditions.
Tripping Characteristics
The three stages of negative sequence overcurrent have the same setting ranges
and time delay as the phase overcurrent.
DM101190EN
Broken Conductor (46BC)
RCA
angle
A typical unbalanced fault that can occur on the system is an open circuit fault. This
fault can arise from broken conductor, discrepancy of one switchgear poles position
or blowing of a fuse.
U
I
MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays are able to measure the ratio of negative to
positive sequence current (I2/I1). This fully programmable function allows more
sensitivity and stability than pure negative sequence measurement.
ard
Forw g
in
p
p
i
r
t
e
zon
P127: Directional Power Protection (32)
MiCOM P127 relays provides a full set of directional power protection including two
independants threshold for each of the following function :
b 3-phases under active power (P<, P<<)
b 3-phases over active power (P>, P>>)
ne
ing zo
ipp
rse tr
Reve
b 3-phases under reactive power (Q<, Q<<)
b 3-phases over reactive power (Q>, Q>>)
Undercurrent Protection (37)
Directional Overcurrent Tripping Zone
MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays provide a definite time undercurrent protection.
This function allows typical applications such as loss of load or simple broken
conductor detection.
P127: Under / Over Voltage (27/59)
DM101191EN
P
The P127 relay provides two independent under-voltage stages and two overvoltage stages. They are definite time elements. Each stage can be configured to
operate from either phase-neutral or phase-phase voltages in single-phase mode
(OR mode) or three-phase mode (AND mode).
Triggering power
P>
P<
and
and
Active power (P)
P>>
Trip
zon
P127: Under / Over Frequency (81U/O)
e
Time delayed under and over frequency protection available on P127 provides the
fundamental form of frequency protection. When the frequency measured is
crossing one of the 6 pre-defined thresholds, the relays generates a start signal and
after a user settable time delay, a trip signal.
Directional
Angle
P<<
Trip
zon
e
2°
0
270
90
180
2°
Q
Directional Active Over / Under Protection
NRJED112402EN
111
3
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
(cont.)
P127: Rate of Frequency (81R)
Time delayed rate of frequency protection in MiCOM P127 is used for severe
disturbances when shedding load in small steps may not be sufficient.
It can also compliment the generator control system to reduce or shed generation
when the frequency rises above the nominal frequency at a high rate.
P127: Residual overvoltage (59N)
P127 provides an additional residual over-voltage stage that can be used for generic
earth faults detection, particularly in insulated neutral system or as backup at busbar
level.
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)
The circuit breaker failure verifies the effective opening of the CB by a dedicated
undercurrent threshold. The circuit breaker failure function can be activated by trip of
a generic protection or/and external command by the relevant digital input. The
circuit breaker failure protection can be used for tripping upstream circuit breakers
too.
3
P127: Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (51V)
The 51V function in P127 is a combination of I>> and U< functions to inhibit trip when
normal generator current is already bigger than I>> threshold:
b Overcurrent function trip will be inhibited if current is bigger than I>> AND voltage
greather than U< (Generator ON => Live busbar).
b Overcurrent function will trip if current is bigger than I>> AND voltage smaller than
U< (Generator OFF => dead MV busbar).
P127: Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS)
P127 offer the possibility to monitor Voltage Transformer presence and could affect
directional overcurrent. When VTS is detected, overcurrent function can be blocked
or changed to a non directional overcurrent. Moreover, as soon as VTS is detected,
all protection functions which needs voltage measure will be blocked (27 & 32N, for
instance).
P127: Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)
Current transformer supervision is provided in MiCOM P127 to detect loss of phase
CT based on zero sequence current occurence combined with zero sequence
voltage disappearance.
Closing of a circuit breaker might inadvertently lead to a short-circuit fault due to a
maintenance ground clamp not yet removed. The MiCOM P123 and P127 relays
incorporate configurable switch on to fault protection. It provides an instantaneous
trip during a settable time after local or remote manual close, or after an automatic
reclosing, or when triggered by a digital Input (downstream protection or 52A).
Time
DM101179EN
P123, P127: Switch on to Fault Protection
Selective Relay Scheme Logic
The MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays include selective relay scheme logic. A
dedicated digital input can temporarily alter the time delay settings in response to the
phase/earth fault start condition of a downstream relay. This function allows the
MiCOM relays to quickly clear the fault when used in a cascade scheme.
Cold Load Pick-up
Cold load pick-up temporarily raises the setting of selectable stages closer to the
load profile, avoiding unwanted trips.
Nominal threshold
Cold-load characteristics
112
Current
Setting value can be increased by 800% during a settable duration. To trigger this
function, either CB close position can be use or an automatic detection based on a
sudden raise of current value.
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Protection functions
(cont.)
P123, P127: Autorecloser (79)
MiCOM P123 and P127 relays include a 4-shot triphase autorecloser. All the
programmed protection functions may independently start any of the shots and the
user can program which functions are allowed to trip after any of the shots. This
makes possible special reclosing cycles e.g. as requested for coordination with
fuses in distribution with tapped transformers.
To prevent excessive number of reclosing cycle in a short period of time, a setting
can be used to define the maximum number of reclosing cycle allowed in a period of
time after first one was detected. Dead and reclaim times are freely adjustable. A
counter stores the number of reclose commands. This information is free locally or
remotely. To inform operator that autorecloser has been blocked internally or
externaly, output relays can be assigned to theses signals.
Outputs Contacts
Any outputs, including trip, can be latched. Reset of the latched outputs is possible
by digital input, operator action on the Human Machine Interface or by remote
communication (Digital Control System).
The two first output contacts (RL1 & RL2) can be used as failsafe relays to provide a
“fail safe alarm” in case of power supply loss or major hardware failure. Other
available relays can be inverted to reverse NO relays operating condition (output
relays closing when logical state of the signal changes from 1 to 0).
Communication & Synchronization
The MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays offer a wide range of communication
protocols, allowing its utilization in most of the network control and data acquisition
systems (via Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103). It has been designed for permanent
multidrop connection through the rear RS485 communication port. A second RS485
is optionaly available on MiCOM P127 for maintenance purpose with Modbus or IEC
60870-5-103.
The MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays incorporate an internal clock to allow a
1ms accuracy time tagging of alarms, events, fault and disturbance record. To avoid
any drifting of the time tagging clock, it’s necessary to periodically synchronize the
relays. To do this P122, P123 and P127 relays offer two solutions:
b Synchronization from the substation control system via the rear communication
port
b Synchronization from an external GPS clock via a dedicated digital input
b Synchronization from an external GPS clock via a modulated or demodulated
IRIG-B signal (P127 only)
NRJED112402EN
113
3
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Control & Monitoring
Setting Groups
External conditions may request the need for different settings. MiCOM P122, P123
and P127 relays provide two independents setting groups. In MiCOM P127, up to 8
settings groups are available to have a flexible management of customer application
schemes. Target settings change (1 to 8) should be performed by DCS or HMI since
digital input status change can only swich from one group to another. Duplication
facilities have been implemented to ease engineering work.
Circuit Breaker Command
To allow an easy and secured command of the circuit breaker through the HMI, a
dedicated menu has been created in MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays. It’s now
possible to send a local open/close command through the HMI after operator
confirmation.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring and Supervision
Circuit-breaker preventive maintenance is an advanced function provided by the
MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays with adjustable closing and opening time
measurements. All fault phase currents I or I2 are cumulated to inform about total
interrupted current. These relays allow trip circuit supervision by using a specific
input.
3
Event Recording
250 events are stored in MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays (even after a power
supply loss) Events include inputs/outputs, change of status, alarms and contact
operations. To upload them, it is possible to use the RS232 front port (MiCOM S1
Studio) or the rear serial port (DCS). Event records are stored on a non volatile flash
memory.
EM100051EN
Fault Recording
The last 25 faults are stored inside the MiCOM P122, P123 and P127 relays.
Each fault includes: Record number/ Fault time / Active setting group / Faulted
phase / Protection operation / Magnitude of input quantities. Fault indicator helps the
user to clearly identify the fault and to monitor relay setting and operations as all
information are available on the relay HMI. Fault records are stored on a non volatile
flash memory.
Disturbance Recording
Up to 5 disturbance files are stored in the relays. Even if the total duration is fixed to
15s, it can be fully adjustable for easy adaptation to customer requirements (1s / 3s /
5s / 7s / 9s). There are stored in COMTRADE format.
The disturbance recording function is triggered either by any of the programmed
thresholds or by an external input, or through the communications. All digital and
analogical information are stored in a flash memory and can be transferred using the
front communication port or the rear port to be used by an external data analyser.
Disturbance records are stored on a non volatile flash memory.
DM101192EN
Example of disturbance record
Boolean logic equation
Optos
Gate logic
Relays
contacts
Up to 8 independent Boolean equations can be used. Each equation offers the
possibility to use AND, OR & NOT logical gates. Up to 16 parameters can be used
for each equation including any threshold and opto-input status. Every result of
equation can be time delayed, reused in another equation (P127) and assigned to
any output relays, trip, trip latching and/or HMI LEDs.
Protection
elements
Automatic
Control
The MiCOM P122/P123/P127 relays integrate complete logic equations to allow
customization of the product based on customer application.
Timers
LED's
Each boolean equation result can be alarmed or not.
MiCOM S1 Studio Support Software
A Support Software MiCOM S1 Studio is available for the entire MiCOM family,
including P122/P123/P127 relays.
S1 Studio is fully WindowsTM compatible. This support Software allows easy setting
of any MiCOM P122/P123/P127 model, preparing, storing, and retrieving setting
files for further download on relay. In addition S1 Studio makes possible reading
measurements and downloading event, fault and disturbance records for post-fault
analysis purpose.
114
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Setting ranges
Protection functions setting ranges
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
130 V 600 s
0.1 V 0.01 s
130 V 600 s
0.1 V 0.01 s
[27] Phase Undervoltage (P127 only)
57–130V Input voltage
U< ?
No or AND or OR
U<
tU<
2V0s
52a Inhib. U< ?
Yes or No
U<< ?
No or AND or OR
U<<
tU<<
2V0s
52a Inhib. U<< ?
Yes or No
[32] Directional Power (P127 only)
3
57–130V Input voltage
“P>?” or “Q>?” or “P<?” or “Q<?”
Yes or No
P> or Q> or P< or Q<
1 W*k (*)
10000 W*k (*)
1 W*k (*)
Directional angle
0°
359°
1°
tP> or tQ> or tP< or tQ<
0s
150 s
0.01 s
“P>>?” or “Q>>?” or “P<<?” or “Q<<?”
Yes or No
P>> or Q>> or P<< or Q<<
1 W*k (*)
10000 W*k (*)
1 W*k (*)
Directional angle
0°
359°
1°
tP>> or tQ>> or tP<< or tQ<<
0s
150 s
0.01 s
(*) k = 1 if TC secondary ration = 1A
[32N] Earth Wattmetric (P127 only / Mode: Pe or IeCos)
High sensitivity
Current input from 0.002 to 1 Ien
57–130V Input voltage
Pe> (*)
0.2xK W
20xK W
0.02xK W
Pe>> (*)
0.2xK W
20xK W
0.02xK W
Med. Sensitivity
Current input from 0.01 to 8 Ien
57–130V Input voltage
Pe> (*)
1xK W
160xK W
0.1xK W
Pe>> (*)
1xK W
160xK W
0.1xK W
Low sensitivity
Current input from 0.1 to 40 Ien
57–130V Input voltage
Pe> (*)
10xK W
800xK W
1xK W
Pe>> (*)
10xK W
800xK W
1xK W
NRJED112402EN
115
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
[32N] Earth Wattmetric (P127 only / Mode: Pe or IeCos)
Med. sensitivity IeCos
IeCos>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
IeCos>>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
IeCos>
0.1 Ien
25 Ien
0.01 Ien
IeCos>>
0.5 Ien
40 Ien
0.01 Ien
IeCos> ?
Yes or No
Delay Type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI,
IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve)
tIeCos>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
IeCos> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
IeCos> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
IeCos> RTMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
IeCos> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
IeCos>> ?
Yes or No
tIeCos>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
IeCos> tReset
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Pe/IeCos Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
Low sensitivity IeCos
3
[37] Under Current
I< ?
Yes or No
P122 / P123
0.2 In
1 In
0.01 In
P127
0.1 In
1 In
0.01 In
tI<
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I< Inhibited on 52A
Yes or No
I<
I< inhibited on U<
I< inhibited on U<
P127
Yes or No
Yes or No
[46] Negative Sequence Overcurrent
I2> ?
I2>
No or Yes
P122 / P123
0.1 In
40 In
0.01 In
P127
0.1 In
25 In
0.01 In
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI,
IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve)
Delay Type
tI2>
I2> TMS
0s
150s
0.01s
P122 / P123
0.025
1.5
0.001
P127
0.025
1.5
0.025
I2> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
I2> RTMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
I2> tReset
0.04 s
100 s
0.01 s
I2>> ?
No or Yes
I2>>
P122 / P123
0.1 In
40 In
0.01 In
P127
0.5 In
40 In
0.01 In
tI2>>
0s
150s
0.01s
I2>>> ?
No or Yes
0.5 In
40 In
0.01 In
0s
150s
0.01s
I2>>>
tI2>>>
116
P127
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
[47] Negative Overvoltage (P127 only)
57–130V Input voltage
V2> ?
No or Yes
V2>
1V
130 V
0.1 V
tV2>
0s
100 s
0.01 s
V2>> ?
No or Yes
V2>>
1V
130 V
0.1 V
tV2>>
0s
100 s
0.01 s
[49] Thermal Overload
Therm. OL ?
No or Yes
I
0.1 In
3.2 In
0.01
Te
1 mn
200 mn
1mn
K
1
1,5
0.01
Trip
50%
200%
1%
Alarm ?
No or Yes
Alarm
50%
200%
1%
25 In
0.01 In
3
[51] Phase Overcurrent
I> ?
No or Yes
I>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI,
IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve)
tI>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
I> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
I> RTMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
I> tReset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1
10
0.1
I> >> >>> interlock
No or Yes
I>> ?
No or Yes
I>>
0.5 In
40 In
0.01 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI,
IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve)
tI>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I>> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
I>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
I>> RTMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
I>> tReset
0.00 s
600 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1
10
0.1
I>>> ?
No or Yes or
Peak
I>>> Sample
No or Yes
I>>>
0.5 In
40 In
0.01 In
tI>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
NRJED112402EN
117
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
Ie>
0.01 Ien
2 Ien
0.005 Ien
Ie>>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
Ie>>>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
Ie>
0.1 Ien
25 Ien
0.1 Ien
Ie>>
0.5 Ien
40 Ien
0.1 Ien
Ie>>>
0.5 Ien
40 Ien
0.1 Ien
Ie> ?
No or Yes
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI,
IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) or RXIDG (only for Cortec code P12-B-X---X)
tIe>
0s
Interlock Ie> >> >>>
No or Yes
K (RI)
[50N/51N] Earth Overcurrent
Med. sensitivity current set
Low sensitivity current set
3
150 s
0.01 s
0.1
10
0.1
Ie> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
Ie> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
Ie> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.001
Ie> tReset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
Ie>> ?
No or Yes
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI,
IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) or RXIDG (only for Cortec code P12-B-X---X)
tIe>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1
10
0.1
Ie>> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
Ie>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
Ie>> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.001
Ie>> tReset
0.04 s
600 s
0.01 s
tIe>>
0s
150
0.01 s
Ie>>> ?
No or Yes
Ie>>> Sample
No or Yes
tIe>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Ie>>>> ?
No or Yes
Ie>>>>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
0.5 Ien
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI,
IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) or RXIDG (only for Cortec code P12-B-X---X)
tIe>>>>
0s
100 s
0.01 s
K (RI)
0.1
10
0.1
Ie>>>> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
Ie>>>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
Ie>>>> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.001
Ie>>>> tReset
0.04 s
600 s
0.01 s
tIe>>>>
0s
150
0.01 s
118
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
[59] Phase Overvoltage (P127 only)
57–130V Input voltage
U> ?
No or AND or OR
U>
tU>
2V
260 V
0.1 V
0s
260 s
0.01 s
U>> ?
No or AND or OR
U>>
tU>>
2V
260 V
0.1 V
0s
600 s
0.01 s
[59] Residual Overvoltage (P127 only)
57–130V Input voltage
Ue>>>> ?
No or Yes
Ue>>>>
1V
260 V
0.1 V
tUe>>>>
0s
600 s
0.01 s
3
ATTENTION: The Ue threshold settings depend on the adopted connection option. in configuration/general options menu of the P127 relay the Ve input can be set
directly from a VT (i.e. from a delta VT) or can be derived from the measurement of the three phase to neutral voltages (3VPN). In this case the ue is calculated as:
Ue = 1/3 x(UA + UB + UC). The setting of the Ue thresholds must take this formula in account.
[67] Directional Overcurrent (P127 only)
I> ?
No or Yes or DIR
I>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI,
IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve)
tI>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
I> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
I> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.025
I> tReset
0s
100 s
0.01 s
I> I>> I>>> Interlock
No or Yes
I> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
I> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
I>> ?
No or Yes or DIR
I>>
0.1 In
40 In
0.01 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI,
IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve)
tI>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I>> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
I>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
I>> RTMS
0.025
3,2
0.025
I>> tReset
0s
100 s
0.01 s
I>> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
I>> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
I>>> ?
No or Yes or DIR or Peak
I>>>
0.1 In
40 In
0.01 In
tI>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I>>> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
I>>> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
NRJED112402EN
25 In
0.01 In
119
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
Ie>
0.01 Ien
1 Ien
0.005 Ien
Ie>>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
Ie>>>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
Ie_d>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Ie_d>>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Ie>
0.1 Ien
25 Ien
0.1 Ien
Ie>>
0.5 Ien
40 Ien
0.1 Ien
Ie>>>
0.5 Ien
40 Ien
0.1 Ien
Ie_d>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Ie_d>>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Ie> ?
No or Yes or DIR
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI,
IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve)
tIe>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Ie> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
Ie> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
Ie> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.025
Ie> tReset
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Interlock
No or Yes
Ie> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
Ie> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
Ue>
1V
260 V
0.1 V
Ue>>
1V
260 V
0.1 V
Ue>>>
1V
260 V
0.1 V
Ue(Ie_d>)
1V
260 V
0.1 V
Ue(Ie_d>>)
1V
130 V
0.1 V
[67N] Earth Fault Directional Overcurrent (P127 only)
Med. sensitivity current set
Low sensitivity current set
3
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V
ATTENTION: The Ue threshold settings depend on the adopted connection option. in configuration/general options menu of the P127 relay the Ve input can be set
directly from a VT (i.e. from a delta VT) or can be derived from the measurement of the three phase to neutral voltages (3VPN). In this case the ue is calculated as:
Ue = 1/3 x(UA + UB + UC). The setting of the Ue thresholds must take this formula in account.
120
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
600 s
0.01 s
[79] Autoreclose (P123 / P127 only)
Autoreclose ?
Yes or No
Ext. CB Fail ?
Yes or No
Ext. CB Fail time
0.01 s
Aux1 ((I>) ?
Aux2 (Ie>) ?
P127
Yes or No
Yes or No
Ext Block ?
Yes or No
Rolling Demand
Yes or No
Max cycles nb
2
100
1
Time period
10mn
24h
10mn
tD1
0.01 s
300 s
0.01 s
tD2
0.01 s
300 s
0.01 s
tD3
0.01 s
600 s
0.01 s
tD4
0.01 s
600 s
0.01 s
tI>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tI>>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tI>>>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tIe>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tIe>>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tIe>>>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
Reclaim time tR
0.02 s
600 s
0.01 s
Inhib time tI
0.02 s
600 s
0.01 s
Phase Cycles
0
4
1
E/Gnd Cycles
0
4
1
Cycles
4321
Settings
Dead time
3
Minimum drop off time
tI>
P123 / P127
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
tI>>
P123 / P127
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
tI>>>
P123 / P127
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
tIe>
P123 / P127
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
tIe>>
P123 / P127
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
tIe>>>
P123 / P127
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
tPe/Iecos>
tPe/Iecos>>
P127
tAux1
P123 / P127
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
tAux2
P123 / P127
1111
0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4
0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip
1 = trip on pick up of the protection element, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on pick up of the protection element also if this has been set in the CRTL/Trip commands/Trip menu.
3 = autoreclose without trip (trip order inhibited, no trip order from autoreclose function).
NRJED112402EN
121
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Setting ranges
(cont.)
OP Parameters
Frequency Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
50 Hz
60 Hz
N.A
[81] Frequency (P127 only)
3
F1?
81> or 81< or No
F1
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF1
0s
600 s
0.01 s
F2?
81> or 81< or No
F2
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF2
0s
600 s
0.01 s
F3?
81> or 81< or No
F3
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF3
0s
600 s
0.01 s
F4?
81> or 81< or No
F4
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF4
0s
600 s
0.01 s
F5?
81> or 81< or No
F5
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF5
0s
600 s
0.01 s
F6?
81> or 81< or No
F6
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF6
0s
600 s
0.01 s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
Rate of change of frequency (P127 only)
dF/dt1 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt1
–10Hz/s
dF/dt2 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt2
–10Hz/s
dF/dt3 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt3
–10Hz/s
dF/dt4 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt4
–10Hz/s
dF/dt5 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt5
–10Hz/s
dF/dt6 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt6
–10Hz/s
122
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Control & monitoring functions
setting ranges
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
Inrush blocking Logic
Inrush Block
Yes or No
Inrush H2 ration
10 %
35 %
0,1 %
Inrush tReset
0 ms
2s
0,1 s
Block I>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I>>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block Ie>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block Ie>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block Ie>>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I2>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I2>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I2>>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block Ie_d>, Ie_d>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
0s
150s
10ms
tAux1
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux2
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux3
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux4
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux5
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux6
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux7
0
20000 s
0.01 s
0
20000 s
0.01 s
0
20000 s
0.01 s
tAuxA (tAux10)
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAuxB (tAux11)
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAuxC (tAux12)
0
200 s
0.01 s
3
Logic selectivity
Sel1 tI>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tI>>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tIe>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tIe>>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tIe>>>>
Sel1 tIe_d>
Sel1 tIe_d>>
P122 / P123
P127
T Sel1
Yes or No
Yes or No
Yes or No
Inrush blocking Logic
tAux8
tAux9
P127
Broken Conductor
Brkn.Cond ?
Yes or No
Ratio I2/I1
20%
100%
1%
Brkn.Cond Time tBC
1s
14400s
1s
NRJED112402EN
123
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
Cold Load PU
Cold Load pickup activable with: tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>, tIe_d, tIe_d>>, tI2>, tI2>>, tI2>>> and/or tTherm
Cold Load PU ?
Yes or No
Input?
Yes or No
Auto?
Yes or No
Cold Load PU level
20%
800%
1%
tCL
0.1s
3600s
0.1s
CB Fail
3
CB Fail ?
Yes or No
I<
0.02 In
1In
0.01 In
CB Fail Time tBF
10 ms
10 s
0.01 s
Block I>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block Ie>
No
Yes
Yes or No
10 s
0.01 s
1s
0.01 s
1s
0.01 s
50000
1
TC Supervision
TC Supervision ?
Yes or No
t trip circuit tSUP
0.1 s
CB Supervision
CB Open S°¶vision?
Yes or No
CB Open time
0.05 s
CB Close S°¶vision?
Yes or No
CB Close time
0.05 s
CB Open Alarm ?
Yes or No
CB Open NB
0
Amps(n) ?
Yes or No
Amps(n)
0 E6 A
4000 E6 A
1E6 A
n
1
2
1
tOpen Pulse(*)
0.10 s
5s
0.01 s
tClose Pulse(*)
0.10 s
5s
0.01 s
NOTE: The tOpen/Close Pulse is available in the P123 for the Local /Remote functionality
SOTF/TOR Switch on to fault / Trip on reclose (P123 & P127 only)
SOTF?
Yes or No
t SOTF
0 ms
I>>
Yes or No
I>>>
Yes or No
Ctrl close input
Yes or No
SOTF input
Yes or No
HMI closing order
Yes or No
[79] closing
Yes or No
Front comm. order
Yes or No
Rear comm. order
Rear2 comm. order
124
500 ms
10ms
Yes or No
P127
Yes or No
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
EQU. A Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. A Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. B Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. B Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. C Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. C Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. D Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. D Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. E Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. E Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. F Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. F Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. G Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. G Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. H Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. H Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
Timer Setting Ranges - Logic equat T delay
3
Logic equat T delay - Communication order delay (P127 only)
tCommand 1
0s
600s
50ms
tCommand 2
0s
600s
50ms
tCommand 3
0s
600s
50ms
tCommand 4
0s
600s
50ms
200V
0.1V
200V
0.1V
100s
10ms
51V Function - P127 only
Voltage range 57-130V
(U<OR V2>) & I>>
Yes or No
V2>
3V
(U<<OR V2>>) & I>>>
Yes or No
V2>
3V
VT Supervision - P127 only
VTS?
Yes or No
VTS Alarm
Yes or No
VTS Blocks 51V
Yes or No
VTS Blocks protection ?
Yes or No
VTS Non Dir I>, I>>, I>>>, Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>, Ie_d> and/or
Ie_d>>
Yes or No
tVTS
0s
CT Supervision - P127 only
CT Supervision
Yes or No
Ie>
0.08 °— In
1.0 °— In
0.01 °— In
Ue< (P127xA)
0.5V
22V
0.1V
Ue< (P127xB)
2V
88V
0.5V
tCTS
0s
100s
0.01s
NRJED112402EN
125
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Availability
Logical gates
A00
B00
C00
D00
NOT
E00
F00
G00
H00
A01 to A15
OR (by default)
AND
AND NOT
OR NOT
B01 to B15 C01 to C15
D01 to D15
E01 to E15 F01 to F15 G01 to G15 H01 to H15
3
Recording functions setting ranges
Event Records
Instantaneous recorder
Capacity
250 events
Capacity
25 faults
Time-lag
1 millisecond
Time-lag
1 millisecond
Triggers
Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Triggers
b Any selected protection alarm and
threshold
b Logic input change of state
b Setting changes
b Self test events
Data
b Date, hour
bOrigin (any protection alarm)
b Length (duration of the instantaneous trip
yes or no
Fault Records
Disturbance Records
Capacity
5 starting informations (instantaneous)
Time-lag
1 millisecond
Triggers
Any selected protection alarm and
threshold
Data
b
b
b
b
b
Fault date
Protection thresholds
Setting Group
AC inputs measurements (RMS)
Fault measurements
Data
Setting range
Function
Default
value
Min
Max
Step
Records
number
5
1
5
1
Pre-Time
0.1s
0.1
2.9 / 4.9 / 6.9
or 8.9
0.1
Disturb
rec Trig
Trigger
126
b Any selected protection alarm and threshold
b Logic input,
b Remote command
b Data AC input channels
b Digital input and output states
b Frequency value
Triggers
ON TRIP
ON TRIP or ON INST.
b Any selected protection alarm and threshold
b Logic input
b Remote command
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Base Unit
Presentation
User-Machine Interface (HMI)
PM103539
All functions, including protection, automation, communication, LEDs, inputs and
outputs, can be programmed and modified using the front panel user interface
(Human Machine Interface).
The backlit LCD informs the user about settings, measurements & faults thanks to
the pull-down structure menu allowing easy and quick access to any data.
Working language
The following languages can be settable in most of the relays:
b French, English, Spanish, Portuguese, Turkish, Polish, Russian, Chinese,
Dutch, German, Italian, Czech, Hungarian and Greek.
Wiring
Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals
PM103538
The individual equipment are delivered with sufficient M4 screws to connect the
relay via annular terminals, with a maximum recommended of two annular
terminals per contact.
Terminals
3
Wire size
Push-on connector : 4.8 x 0.8mm
0.75 - 1.5 mm²
Push-on connector : 4.8 x 0.8mm
1.5 - 2.5 mm²
M4 90° Ring Tongue terminal
0.25 - 1.65 mm²
M4 90° Ring Tongue terminal
1.5 - 2.5 mm²
Communication
Communication software: MiCOM S1 Studio.
Type Port
Physical Link
Connectors
Data Rate
Comms. mode
Protocol
RS485
Rear port
Screened twister
pair
Screws or snap-on
b 300 to 38400 baud
(programmable)
b ModBus RTU
b IEC60870-5-103
RS485 isolated
(P127 Optional 2nd
rear port)
Screened twister
pair
Screws or snap-on
b 300 to 38400 baud
(programmable)
b Data Bit: 8
b Stop bit: 1/ 2
b Parity:
None/Odd/Even
b Address: 1 to 254
USB / RS232
Front port
Screened twister
pair
PC: 9 pin D-type
male connector
P122/123/127:
Sub–D 9 pin female
connectorr
b 300 to 38400 baud
(programmable)
b
b
b
b
Data Bit:8
Stop bit: 1
Parity: None
Address: 1
b ModBus RTU
b IEC60870-5-103
(option)
b ModBus RTU
IRIG-B interface (P127 only)
The IRIG-B is a P127 optional interface used to receive synchronization signal
from a GPS clock.
NRJED112402EN
Modulated (1kHz)
No modulated
b BNC socket and BNC adaptor
b total impedance: 50
b Screw
b SELV rated circuit
b Date code: BCD
127
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
Base Unit
(cont.)
Dimensions & weight
177
158.74
102.4
156
DM101195EN
MiCOM P122 / P123
P122 / P123
102.4 mm (20TE)
b Depth
247.1 mm
b Weight
approx. 2 Kg
98.31
96.3
29.6
13.1
10.5
13.1
51.82
10
4.5
177 mm
N.4
3.4
All the CT inputs are automatically short-circuited as
soon as the active unit is withdrawn in its case.
b Weight
approx. 4 Kg
177
158.74
13
103.67
10
154,2 mm (30TE)
247,1 mm
13
10.7
159
b Width
b Depth
150.11
148.1
29.6
N.4
25.1
177mm
154.2
247.1
222
P127
b Height
MiCOM P127
168
External connections are made via MIDOS type
terminal blocks. Each connection includes two 4.8 mm
Faston and one M4 screw fixing. The wiring for all the
MiCOM P122/P123/P127 are standard to provide
maximum compatibility.
4.4
99
156
Wiring
N.4
4.5
To insure a compliance with any auxiliary voltage
source and minimize variants, a universal power
supply board from 24 to 250Vac/dc is available along
the MiCOM P122/P123/P127 range.
25.1
168
159
P122/P123/P127 are based on advanced numerical
technology. All the models of the MiCOMP122/P123/
P127 have a 4U draw out metal case, and can be
flush-mounted in switchboard or panel or rackmounted.
247.1
222
Hardware and Case
DM101196EN
3
b Height
b Width
3.4
151.05
N.4
4.4
Note: For P127 with IRIG-B option with BNC adaptor, add 25 mm to the length.
128
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
(cont.)
Front panel description
2
2
Clear key)
3
Read key
4
Key pad (cursor keys)
5
Fixed function LEDs
6
User programmable function LEDs
7
Plastic cover
8
Battery (not used)
9
Comms front port (RS232)
3
1
PM103538
Top cover
2
PM103539
1
3
5
4
6
5
4
6
9
8
9
8
7
MiCOM P122 / P123
(20TE)
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P127
(30TE)
129
3
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
(cont.)
P122/P123: Advice for external connections
DM101193EN
Scheme representing micom relay off
The current inputs are connected to 3 phase CTs + a core balanced CT.
A
P2
P1 P2
S2
B
C
S2
P1
{
S1
Auxiliary
voltage
S1
37
+
_
33
12
52
53
8
14
20
RL4
54
55
18
3
1A
RL5
56
41
1
7
RL6
5A
5
9
42
43
3
10
16
RL3
1A
Phase rotation
2
RL2
1A
B
4
RL1
50
51
C
36
6
34
49
1A
A
35
WD
RL7
11
5A
13
RL8
44
45
15
P123 only
5A
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
Watch dog (4)
Programmable tripping
output
Programmable output
Programmable output
Programmable output
Programmable output
Programmable output
Programmable output
Programmable output
46
47
5A
48
{
{
{
{
{
Programmable
input
Programmable
input
Programmable
input
Programmable
input
Programmable
input
+
22
24
+
26
28
+
17
19
+
21
23
+
25
27
-
MiCOM
P122/P123
L1
L2
L3
Case earth connection
29
*
L4
31
L5
Communication
cable shield
30
32
*
_
+
}
RS 485
Port communication
( : terminating resistor for the
last relay to be connected
between 30-32)
P123 only
Nota :
(1)
(a)
(b)
CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect
Short terminals break before (c)
(c)
Long terminals
(d)
Pins terminals (pcb type)
(2) CT connection are typical only
(3) Earth terminals are typical only
(4) The MICOM P122/P123 relays are shown with supply off.
Alternative :
The earth current input is connected to the sommation of the three phase CTs.
A
B
P1
P2
S2
Alternative :
Connection to 2 phases CTs + a core balanced CT.
A
S1
P2
C
C
49
1A
P1 P2
S2
B
S2
P1
S1
S1
49
1A
50
51
1A
50
51
1A
52
53
1A
52
53
1A
54
55
1A
54
55
1A
56
41
5A
56
41
5A
42
43
5A
42
43
5A
44
45
5A
44
45
5A
46
47
5A
48
130
46
47
5A
48
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P122 / P123 / P127
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
(cont.)
P127: Advice for external connections
DM101194EN
Scheme representing micom relay off
Three phases VTs (UA, UB, UC)
Protection CT
Watchdog (4)
Auxiliary
voltage
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
3
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Terminals "30/32" and "78/80" to
be connected at the end of
RS485 bus.
BNC adaptor board
IRIG B
Modulated
= optional
NRJED112402EN
IRIG B
Unmodulated
131
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P220 / P225
Motor Protection Relays
PM100520
The MiCOM P22x protection relay range is designed for motor protection
applications. A complete set of protection functions is performed on the
measurement of current, voltage* and temperature. In addition to these basic
functions, the relay carries out a large number of other functions that enable it to
protect and run the motor more effectively.
The reliability of the system is further enhanced via checks on bus voltage prior to
start-up* during reacceleration, supervision of trip-circuit wiring continuity and
protection against circuit-breaker failure.
The MiCOM P22x protection relay range is particularly adapted to oil refinery,
chemical plant, metallurgy, glass and cement manufacturing, paper mills, electrical
and mechanical engineering, food production, mining etc. It is also suitable for water
treatment and in pumping stations as well as in steam power plants.
On top of that high inertia loads and anti-backspin protection ensures that the rotor
stops before the motor can be re-started.
3
The MiCOM P220 / P225 relays are designed
to secure industrial processes. Their wide
range of features provides complete
protection for all types of application , and a
rapid and selective clearance of motor faults.
For motors whose current supply contains a considerable degree of distortion, the
relay provides a true RMS base thermal image allowing efficient protection against
overload phenomena due to the presence of harmonic components.
The addition of power measurement* and energy metering*, and the presence of
analogue outputs (current loop) make the MiCOM P22x protection relay range a
highly competitive and effective equipment in terms of protection.
* P225 only
Application
The MiCOM P22x protection relay range performs and offers numerous functions in
a compact design:
Customer benefits
b Protection
b Monitoring
b Provide comprehensive protection functions for a
wide range of applications
b Diagnosis
b Optimize the installation cost
b Aid to maintenance
b Improve monitoring conditions
b Reduce the need of documents and trainings
b Save time on day-to-day use
b Fault analysis tools
Compact and “Plug and play”, the P22x protection relay range supplies
essential functions for industry applications, where the following
requirements must be achieved:
b Small and medium motors
b High inertia
b Easy to use
b Universal auxiliary supply
b Low cost
Main functions
Protection functions are autonomous and can be individually configured
or disabled to suit a particular application.
132
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Ratings
Inputs and Outputs Ratings
Analogue current inputs
Phase currents In
1 and 5 A
Earth current Ion
1 and 5 A
Frequency
Burdens
Range
45 to 65 Hz
Nominal
50/60 Hz
Phase current inputs
b < 0.3 VA @ In (5A)
b < 0,025 VA @ In (1A)
Earth current input
b < 0.01 VA @ 0.1Ion (5A)
b < 0,004 VA @ 0,1 Ion (1A)
Thermal withstand of both phase and earth current inputs
b 100 In - 1 s
b 40 In - 2 s
b 4 In - continuous
Analogue voltage inputs (P225 only)
b Phase A - Phase C voltage input : Vn
b or 3-phase voltage inputs (optional)
Frequency
3
b 57-130 Volt (range A)
b 220-480 Volt (range B)
Range
45 to 65 Hz
Nominal
50/60 Hz
Burden
< 0,1 VA @ Vn
Thermal withstand
Range A
b 260 V - continuous
b 300 V - 10 s
Range B
b 960 V - continuous
b 1300 V - 10 s
Logic inputs
Type
Independent optical isolated
Number
b Standard: 6 (5 programmable, 1 fixed)
b Optional: 5 additional digital inputs
Burden
< 10 mA for each input
Recognition time
< 5 ms
Supply ratings
Relay auxiliary power supply
Logic Inputs
Ordering
Code
Nominal
voltage range Vx
Operating voltage
range
Nominal
Voltage range
Minimal
polarisation
voltage
Z
b 24 – 250 Vdc
b 48 – 240 Vac
b 19.2 – 300 Vdc
b 38.2 – 264 Vac
b 24 – 250 Vdc
b 24 – 240 Vac
b 19,2 Vdc
b 19.2 Vac
NRJED112402EN
Maximum
polarisation
current
Holding current
after 2 ms
Maximum
continuous
withstand
35 mA
2.3 mA
b 300 Vdc
b 264 Vac
133
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Ratings
(cont.)
Output relay
Contact rating
Contact relay
Dry contact Ag Ni
Make current
Max. 30A and carrry for 3s
Carry capacity
5A continuous
Rated Voltage
250Vac
Breaking characteristic
Breaking capacity AC
b 1500 VA resistive
b 1500 VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5)
b 220 Vac, 5A (cos = 0.6)
Breaking capacity DC
b 135 Vdc, 0.3A (L/R = 30 ms)
b 250 Vdc, 50W resistive or 25W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
Operation time
<7ms
Operation time
3
Durability
<7ms
Loaded contact
10000 operation minimum
Unloaded contact
100000 operation minimum
Optional 6 or 10 RTD inputs
RTD type
Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10
Connection type
3 wires + 1 shielding
Maximum load
b 25 (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120)
b 2,5 (Cu10)
Insulation
2 kV, active source mode
Accuracy
Protection thresholds
±2%
Time delays
Measurements
± 2 % with a minimum of 40ms
Current
Typical ± 0,2 % @ In
Voltage
Typical ± 0,2 % @ Vn
Power
Typical ± 1 % @ Pn
Temperature
± 2 °C
Pass band for measurements of true RMS values
500Hz
CT & VT data
Phase CTs primary
1 to 3000 by steps of 1
Earth CT primary
1 to 3000 by steps of 1
Phase CTs secondary
1 or 5
Earth CT secondary
1 or 5
Recommended phase CTs
5P10 - 5VA (typical)
Recommended earth CT
Residual connection or core balanced CT (preferred in isolated neutral systems)
VT primary (P225 only)
VT secondary (P225 only)
134
1 to 20 000 V by steps of 1 V
Range A
57 to 130 V by steps of 0,1 V
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
Functional overview
DM101198EN
(Description of ANSI code nos., see Protection Functions Table)
Front port
Rear port
Remote (RS485)
ModBus RTU
IEC 60870-5-103*
Kbus - Courier
Local (RS232)
setting
50N
50
b Phase currents
b Positive and Negative
Currents
b Peak current value
b Phase to phase voltage
b Unbalance
b Frequency
b Active/reactive power
b Active/reactive energies
b Power factor
CB Local/Remote
CB Monitoring
Self Monitoring
Programmable
AND Logic
51N
51
50BF
37
48
49
51LR
51S
46
• • • • • • • • •
• • •
V
MEASUREMENTS
b
b
b
b
RECORDING
FEATURES
Fault Record
25
Event Recording
250
Dist. Recording
2.5 sec
• •
I earth
I
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
27
59
3
66
•
•
•
•
•
Digital Opto Inputs
6 / 10
27LV
14
(Rot. Speed)
Motor
>
>
>
>
26
(RTD)
Conventional
signalling
Protection Relays P220 and P225
Standard
Option
*: grouped options
ANSI codes
Protection functions
12/14
Speed switch inputs
P220
P225

27/59
Phase under/over voltage (AND & OR mode)

27LV
Re-acceleration autorisation
37
Undercurrent / Loss of load


38/49T
Optional RTD
6
10
46
Negative phase sequence overcurrent


48/ 51LR
Start / Stalled Protection / Motor Re-Acceleration


49
Thermal overload


50BF
Circuit breaker failure
50 / 51
3-Phase overcurrent





50N / 51N
Earth overcurrent / Sensitive earth fault


51S
Locked Rotor during Start-up


66
Number of Starts Limitation


86
Output relay latching


CBF
Circuit breaker fail protection


TCS
Trip Circuit Supervision


NRJED112402EN
135
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P220 / P225
Protection functions
(cont.)
Control and Monitoring
P220
P225
Emergency Restart


Selective relay scheme logic


Boolean logic equation
8
8
AND / OR and NOT gates




CB Control & Monitoring (Local/ remote)
Setting Groups
2
2
Auxiliary timers
10
10


Hours Run


CB Operations


Measurements and Records
Measurements
Power and Energy Measurements
3

Disturbance Records up to number x 2.5 sec (backed-up)
5
5
Fault Records (backed-up)
25
25
Event Logging (backed-up)
250
250
Front port (RS232)


Rear port (RS485)


Modbus RTU


IEC 60870-5-103


Logic inputs
6
6
Outputs relays
6
6
1/5 dual rated AC Current inputs (settable)
4
4
Communication
Rear Port Communication Protocol
Hardware
57….130 V AC Voltage inputs
1/3
Three-Phase Overcurrent (50/51)
Three independent stages are available in P220/P225 for phase fault protection. For
the first and second stage the user may independently select definite time delay
(DTOC) or inverse time delay (IDMT) with different type of curves (IEC, IEEE/ANSI,
RI). The third stage is definite time only. Each stage and related time delay can be
programmed to provide maximum selectivity. The IDMT stages have reset definite or
IDMT timer to reduce clearance times when intermittent faults occur.
Earth Fault (50N/51N)
Two elements are available. Each threshold has instantaneous and delayed signal at
its disposal. The adjustment range for earth current threshold varies from 0.002 to 1
Ien, allowing maximum sensitivity for earth fault detection. The relay’s earth current
input can be wired to a core balanced CT or to the summation of the three-phase
CTs.
CB Failure (50BF)
The CB failure on fault will be detected very quickly by the P220/P225 relays, which
will then either send a new local tripping signal or act directly on the immediately
upstream CB.
By speeding up the time taken to clear the fault in the case of CB failure, the P220/
P225 relays help maintain the stability of the network and the reliability of the
protection system.
136
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P220 / P225
Protection functions
(cont.)
Limitation of the Number of Starts,
Time between Starts (66)
The number of motor start-ups can be limited. The P22x relay can discriminate
between a warm and a cold motor, making it possible to optimise the number of
start-ups allocated to a particular motor over a given period of time. Setting a
minimum delay between two start-ups avoids exposing the motor and its start-up
system to over-large resultant stresses.
Loss of Load (37)
Loss of load, caused by shaft rupture or the unpriming of a pump, is detected by a
timed minimum phase under current threshold. This function can be deactivated
during the start-up phase so that the motor can gradually increase its load.
Unbalance, Loss of Phase and Single Phasing (46)
Two overcurrent elements based on the negative sequence component of current
are available. One is associated with an IDMT characteristic, while the other has a
definite time characteristic. The two elements make it possible to differentiate
between a short or low amplitude unbalance and a more marked phenomenon such
as loss of phase or single phasing.
Thermal Overload (38/49T) - True RMS Base
The thermal image of the MiCOM P22x relay allows for simultaneous protection of
the rotor and stator windings of the motor, whatever the operating conditions of the
machine, under and overload operating conditions, during start-up, with rotor locked
or with the motor off.
Classic I2t thermal images afford protection to stator windings but do not take
account of overheating in the rotor during a current unbalance. Similarly, the
presence of harmonic current components causes additional overheating of the
stator windings. In order to take this overheating properly into account, the P22x
relay separates the negative sequence current and reconstitutes it with the true RMS
value of the stator currents absorbed by the motor. The result is better protection
against overloads and hence a marked decrease in the risk of motor damage. An
alarm threshold, tripping threshold and thermal threshold, beyond which the motor
cannot be re-started, are available.
As an option, RTDs can be connected to the MiCOM P220/P225 relays to monitor
the motor’s temperature. For each of the RTD channels, two temperature thresholds
with individual time-delay settings are available. It is therefore possible to monitor
stator windings separately, as well as the spin bearings of the motor and the load
involved.
P225: Undervoltage (27) / Overvoltage (59) / Re-acceleration
Authorisation (27 LV) ) / Auto Restart
If supply voltage drops or the supply is lost completely, a phase-to-phase under
voltage threshold causes the motor to stop. This function on P225 relays can be
selectively put into or out of operation during the motor start-up phase. An overvoltage threshold (P225 only) protects against over-voltage and also give warning of
ageing insulators.
The relays can detect voltage sag via the voltage input (P225 only) or by using an
external U/V device and a logical input of the relay (P220/P225). Depending on the
duration of the voltage sag, the P220/P225 relays can authorise a re-acceleration of
the motor when voltage is restored or, on the other hand, stop the motor to allow the
motors most critical to the process to re-accelerate. P225 relay can also auto re-start
the motor if the voltage is restored within a set time after it has been stopped due to
voltage sag condition or a sequential re-start to be programmed to allow load
restoration in a controlled manner.
Latching of Output Relays (86)
The trip order can be maintained to avoid the risk of re-starting on an electrical,
mechanical or thermal fault.
NRJED112402EN
137
3
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P220 / P225
Protection functions
(cont.)
Excessive Start Time (48) / Locked Rotor while Running or at
Start-up (51LR)
Whether the motor is unloaded or coupled to a heavy load, this function monitors the
duration of the motor start-up phase. The choice of the motor’s start-up detection
criteria makes it possible to use this function, whatever the motor’s start-up mode:
eg, direct-on-line, star-delta, auto-transformer, resistor insertion, etc. During normal
motor operation, an overcurrent threshold detects rotor stalling.
Locked Rotor while Running or at Start-up (51S)
During motor start-up, a locked rotor is detected with the help of a speed switch input
on P220/P225 relays.
Anti-backspin
If a motor with a high inertia load, for example a fan, is stopped, the shaft continues
to rotate for some time before the rotor stops completely. If the motor is switched
back on while the rotor is still turning, a condition akin to a false coupling may occur,
causing mechanical damage such as broken fan blades. The risk of such problems
can be eliminated by setting a minimum time-lapse between stopping the motor and
re-starting it.
3
Presence of Bus Voltage Prior to Start-up
Prior to starting the motor, the P225 relay check that voltage levels are sufficiently
high before authorising the start-up sequence.
Emergency Start-up
When required by safety conditions or by the process, a logical input of the P22x
relay can be used to allow motor start-up. All start-up restrictions will then be
inhibited and the thermal image function will be disabled.
Overspeed (12)
Detection of machine overspeed, based on the speed calculated by pulse-counting,
to detect synchronous generator racing due to loss of synchronism, or for process
monitoring, for example.
Underspeed (14)
Machine speed monitoring based on the speed calculated by pulse-counting:
b detection of machine underspeed after starting, for process monitoring, for
example
b zero speed data for detection of locked rotor upon starting.
138
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Control & Monitoring
Control functions
Independent Protection Setting Groups
By virtue of its two setting groups, the MiCOM P22x relay allows for the protection of
dual-speed motors as well as motors operating under environmental or operational
conditions, which are not constant over time. A change of setting group can be useful
following a change in source impedance. The result is improved selectivity.
Boolean logic equation
MiCOM P22x can achieve up to 4 AND logical gates linked to time delays, by
combining internal and external information with the protection relay. The user can
also create OR gates by individually programming each output relay. The logical
gates help make economies on external relaying and make the relay interactive with
the process.
Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)
Current transformer supervision is provided to detect loss of phase CT based on zero
sequence current occurence combined with zero sequence voltage disappearance.
CB Monitoring
Preventive CB maintenance is provided by monitoring summated contact breaking
duty, the number of switching operations and the opening time. If a pre-set threshold
is exceeded, the P220/P225 relay will generate an alarm signal.
External Trips
The P22x relay accepts external binary signals, which can be used to give a trip or
alarm signal, or which may simply be treated as binary information to be passed on
through the relay to a remote control system.
Shape of Start-up Current and Voltage
EM100052EN
The MiCOM P22x relay records the envelope of both start-up current and voltage
signals with a resolution of one sample for every 5 periods. This recording can be
uploaded to a PC via the communication network or via the RS232 port on the front
plate. It is very helpful to be able to visualise these curves during commissioning and
this function of the MiCOM P22x avoids the need for a plotter.
Motor Start Curves
Analogue Outputs
Two optional analogue outputs are available. Some information and measurements
such as power (P225), energy (P225) and temperature values, etc., can be fed
through a current loop to a PLC.
Trip Cause Statistics
The MiCOM P22x relay provides the user with trip statistics for every protection
function. The user can thus keep track of the number of trips, which have taken place
as well as their origin.
NRJED112402EN
139
3
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P220 / P225
Control & Monitoring
(cont.)
Measurements and recording facilities
Measurements
The MiCOM P22x relay constantly measures a large amount of electrical data, such
as:
b Phase current magnitude in true RMS value: IA, IB, IC
b Neutral current magnitude in true RMS value: IN
b Positive sequence current I1
b Negative sequence current I2
b Zero sequence current Io
b Unbalance ratio I1/I2
b Frequency
b Peak current value
b Phase-to-phase voltage in true RMS value (P225 only)
b Active and reactive power W and VAR (P225 only)
b Active and reactive energies Wh and VARh (P225 only)
3
b Power factor (P225 only)
To provide the user with more accurate information on the motor’s status and
availability, the P22x relay keeps track of:
b Thermal status of the motor
b Load value as a % of full load current
b Time to thermal trip
b Temperature of each RTD (optional)
b Hottest RTD (optional)
b Authorised start number
b Time before another start-up authorisation
b Last start current magnitude
b Last start time value
b Number of starts and emergency starts
b Total motor running hours
Event Records
The last 250 status changes are recorded in a non-volatile memory. This covers all
status changes to logic inputs and outputs, modifications to one or more parameters,
alarm signals or the operation of one of the output contacts. Events are logged every
1 ms.
Fault Records
The P22x relay records the last 25 faults. The information provided in the fault record
includes:
b Fault number
b Date and time
b Active setting group
b Faulty phase or phases
b Function that gave the trip
b Magnitude of the value that gave rise to the trip command
b Values of the phases and earth currents and voltage (P225 only)
Disturbance Records
5 disturbance records, of 2.5 seconds each, can be stored. Disturbance record can
be uploaded via the communication network (RS485) or locally (RS232)
140
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P220 / P225
Control & Monitoring
(cont.)
Dedicated and Programmable LEDs
4 LEDs show the relay’s status (Trip, Alarm, Warning and Healthy). MiCOM P22x
relay offers free programming of 4 LEDs. Each LED can be assigned to one or more
functions or logic states and then limit the need for external signal lights. Each LED
can also be assigned to to any one of the 6 logical inputs as well as the internal Auto
Re-start signal.
Local and Remote Communication
The MiCOM P220/P225 relays are equipped with a RS485 port on its rear plate,
which enables them to communicate via MODBUS , Courier or IEC 60870-5-103. It
is thus possible to transmit adjustment values, measurement data, alarm signals and
all other recordings to the Substation Control System or to a SCADA.
Communication parameters can be adjusted by the operator via the user interface.
Communication failure does not affect MiCOM relays’ protective functions.
Software support
MiCOM S1 Studio software makes it possible to pre-set all MiCOM P22x relay
parameters from a PC. The relay is then accessed via the RS232 port on the front
panel.
MiCOM S1 Studio software is fully compatible with Windows (95, 98, NT, 2000,
XP), and can download relay settings, pull up current relay settings and upload
measurement values, diagnostic data, fault records, disturbance records, start-up
current and voltage shapes and event logging data.
NRJED112402EN
141
3
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
Protection functions setting ranges
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
5V
130 V
0,1 V
Time-delay tV<
0s
600 s
0,01 s
V< inhibition during start-up
Yes/No
Hysteresis
105 %
[27] Undervoltage protection (P225 only)
Voltage threshold V<
Range A
[37] Under current (Loss of load) protection
3
Current threshold I<
0,1 In
1 In
0,01 In
Time-delay tI<
0,2 s
100 s
0,1 s
Inhibition time at start-up Tinhib
0,05 s
300 s
0,1 s
Hysteresis
105%
[46] Unbalance protection
Negative sequence current threshold I2>
0,04 In
0,8 In
0,01 In
Time-delay tI2>
0s
200 s
0,01 s
Negative sequence current threshold I2>>
0,04 In
0,8 In
0,01 In
IDMT time-delay
t = TMS x 1,2/(I2/In)
Time Multiplier setting TMS I2>>
0,2
2
0,001
Hysteresis
95%
0.2 In
1.5 In
0.01 In
Negative sequence current recognition factor Ke
0
10
1
Overload time-constant Te1
1 min
180 min
1 min
Start-up time-constant Te2
1 min
360 min
1 min
Cooling time-constant Tr
1min
999 min
1 min
Trip thermal threshold
Set to 100%
Thermal alarm threshold
20%
100%
1%
Thermal trip & alarm thresholds hysteresis
97%
Start-up inhibition
20%
100%
1%
Current threshold I>
0.1 In
25 In
0.05 In
Delay type
DT, IDMT or RI
Time delay tI> (DMT)
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Reset time tReset
0 to 600 s by steps of 0.01 s
Interlock with I>> & I>>> (IDMT)
Yes / No
Reverse Time Multiplier Setting (IDMT reset delay type)
0.025
1.5
0.01
K multiplier (RI curve)
0.1
10
0.001
Current threshold I>>
0.5 In
40 In
0.05 In
Delay type
DT, IDMT or RI
Time delay tI>> (DMT)
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Reverse Time Multiplier Setting (IDMT reset delay type)
0.025
1.5
0.01
K multiplier (RI curve)
0.1
10
0.001
Current Time delay tI>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
threshold I>>>
0.5 In
40 In
0.05 In
Time delay tI>>> (DMT)
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Operating time
< 40 m
Drop-off time
< 30 ms
Hysteresis
95 %
[49] Thermal replica
Thermal current threshold I
>
[50/51] Short-circuit protection
142
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
Current threshold Io>, Io>>
0.002 Ion
1 Ion
0.001 Ion
Time-delays tIo>, tIo>>
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Operating time
< 40 ms
Drop-off time
30 ms
Hysteresis
95%
5 In
0.01 In
60 s
0.1 s
[50/51N] Earth fault protection
[51LR/50S] Locked rotor protection
Current threshold Istall
0.5 In
Hysteresis
95%
Time-delay tIstall
0.1 s
Locked rotor at start-up detection
No/Input/Power Factor
Power factor
0.01
1
0.01
Range A
5V
260 V
0.1 V
Range B
20 V
960 V
0.5 V
Time-delay tV>
0s
600 s
0.01 s
Hysteresis
95 %
3
[59] Overvoltage protection (P225 only)
Voltage threshold V>
Too long start-up protection (Start-Up criteria)
Start-up detection criteria
(closing 52) or (closing 52 + current threshold) optional
Current threshold IUTIL
0.5 In
5 In
0.01 In
Time-delay tIstart
1s
200 s
1s
Thresholds
0 °C
200 °C
1 °C
Time delays
0s
100 s
0.1 s
Thermal image influence
Yes/No
Optional 6 (P220) or 10 (P225) RTD inputs
NRJED112402EN
143
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Automation functions setting ranges
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
Reference period Treference
10 min
120 min
5 min
Number of cold starts
1t
5
1
Number of hot starts
0
5
1
Restart inhibition time TInterdiction
1 min
20 min
1 min
1 min
120 min
1 min
1s
7200 s
1s
37 V
98 V
0.2 V
[66] Limitation of the number of start-ups
Time between 2 start-ups
Inhibition time Tbetw 2 start
Anti-backspin protection
Restart prevention time tABS
3
Re-acceleration authorization (P225 only)
Voltage dip detection
Range A
Range B
143 V
360 V
0.2 V
Voltage restoration detection
Range A
45 V
117 V
0.2 V
Range B
176 V
32 V
0.2 V
Voltage collapse duration Treacc
0.1 s
5s
0.01 s
Auto Re-Start delay treacc long
OFF
60 s
1s
Auto Re-Start restoration delay treacc shed
OFF
99 min
1 min
Range A
5V
130 V
0.1 V
Range B
20 V
480 V
0.5 V
Presence of bus voltage prior to start-up (P225 only)
Voltage threshold
Hysteresis
105 %
CB failure
Current threshold I< BF
10 % In
100% In
10% In
Time-delay tBF
0.03 s
10 s
0.01 s
0.1 s
10 s
0.01 s
200 s
0.01s
Trip circuit supervision
Time-delay tSUP
Auxiliary timers
Logic inputs with alarm message on occurrence
tAux1 to tAux10
Timers tAux1 to tAux10
0s
Boolean logic equation
b 8 independants equations are available
b Each one can used a maximum of 16 operands among all start and trip signal
b Each one can use NOT. OR. AND, OR NOT, AND NOT logical gates
t operate
0s
600s
0.01s
t Reset
0s
600s
0.01s
Latching of output relays
Trip relay (RL1)
Configurable for each trip order
Auxiliary relays (RL2, RL3, RL4 and RL5)
Configurable for each auxiliary relay
CB control and monitoring
Close command hold
0.2 s
5s
0.05 s
Open command hold
0.2 s
5s
0.05 s
Number of operations alarm
0 operations
50 000 operations
1
Summated contact breaking duty
106
4 000.106
106
Adjustment of the exponent «n»
1 or 2
Opening time alarm
0.05 s
1s
0.05 s
144
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Recording functions setting ranges
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
Event recorder
Capacity
250 events
Time-tag
to 1 millisecond
Triggers
b
b
b
b
Any protection alarm & threshold
Any logic input change of state
Self test events
Any setting change
Fault recorder
Capacity
25 records
Time-tag
to 1 millisecond
Triggers
b Any trip order (RL1 operation)
Data
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
3
Fault record number
Fault date & hour
Active setting group
Faulty phase(s)
Fault type, protection threshold
Fault current/voltage magnitude
Phase A, B, C and earth current magnitudes
Phase A-Phase C voltage magnitude
VAB, VBC, VCA (“3 voltage inputs” option)
Oscillography
Capacity
5 records
Duration of each record
2,5 s
Sampling rate
32 samples per frequency cycle
Pre-time setting
0,1 s
2,5 s
0,1 s
Post-time setting
0,1 s
2,5 s
0,1 s
Triggers
b Any protection threshold overreach or any trip order (RL1 relay operation)
b Logic input
b Remote command
Data
b
b
b
b
4 analogue current channels (3 + N)
Logic input and output states
Frequency value
1 (or 3) analogue voltage channel (“3 voltage inputs” option)
Start-up current and voltage envelope record
Capacity
1 record
Maximum duration
200 s
Sampling rate
Data
NRJED112402EN
1 sample each 5 frequency cycles
Current
True RMS value, maximum value of one of the 3 phase currents
Voltage (P225 only)
True RMS value
145
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
Presentation
User-Machine Interface (HMI) - Front Plate and Menus
PM103538
All the relay’s parameters, ie., protection functions, logic controls, communication,
LEDs, inputs and outputs, can be programmed and modified by push-buttons
located on the front panel. An alphanumeric, backlit, 32-character LCD screen
displays all the relay’s data (settings, measurements, etc.).
The menus are designed so that the user can move around them easily, without
confusion. The user will soon be at ease with the Human-Machine Interface.
Working language
The following languages can be settable in most of the relays:
b French, English, Spanish, Portuguese, Turkish, Polish, Russian, Chinese, Dutch,
German, Italian, Czech, Hungarian and Greek.
Wiring
The individual equipment is delivered with sufficient M4 screws and washers to
connect the relay via insulated crimp/pressure ring terminals. The maximum number
of insulated crimp/pressure ring terminations, per terminal block terminal shall be
two.
3
Terminals
Wire size
Push-on connector: 4.8 x 0.8mm
0.75 - 1.5 mm² /22AWG - 16AWG
0.25 - 1.65 mm²
22AWG - 16AWG
1.04 - 2.63 mm²
16AWG - 14AWG)
M4 90° Ring Tongue terminal
M4 90° Ring Tongue terminal
NOTE: Pressure/crimp push-on or ring terminals may be used for communication circuit
connections. Only pressure/crimp ring terminals shall be used for connections to other circuits
Communication
Communication software: MiCOM S1 Studio.
Type Port
Physical Link
Connectors
Data Rate
Protocol
RS485
Rear port
Screened twister pair
Screws or snap-on
b 300 to 38400 baud
(programmable)
b ModBus RTU
b IEC60870-5-103
RS232
Front port
Screened twister pair
PC: 9 pin D-type male
connector
b 300 to 38400 baud
(programmable)
b ModBus RTU
P220/225: Sub–D 9 pin
female connectorr
146
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
(cont.)
ModBus
IEC 60870-5-103
Transmission mode
Synchronous
Synchronous
Front comms.
Interface
RS 485, 2 wires
+ shielding
RS 485, 2 wires
+ shielding
RS232 / Protocol: MODBUSTM RTU
Data rate
300 to 38 400 bauds
(programmable)
9600 to 19200 bauds
(programmable)
19200 bauds
Relay address 1
to 255
1 to 254
Parity
Settable
Even
Comms. mode
RTU standard
Date format
IEC format or Private format
Connection
Multi-point
(32 connections)
Multi-point (32 connections)
Sub-D 9 pin female connector
Cable
Half-duplex (screened twisted wire
pair)
Half-duplex (screened twisted wire
pair)
Screened twisted wire cable, nocrossed
Maximum cable length
1000 meters
1000 meters
Without
b Data Bit:8
b Stop bit: 1
Connector
Connector screws or snap-on
Connector screws or snap-on
Insulation
2 kV RMS
2 kV RMS
3
Dimensions & weight
The MiCOM P220/P225 relays are housed in a 4U
case and suitable for either rack or flush-mounted.
The relay can be withdrawn from its case with the
supply voltage connected due to the presence of
internal shorting links protecting the current circuits.
DM101216EN
Case
Dimensions P220 / P225
b Height
177mm
b Width
154,2 mm (30TE)
b Depth
247,1 mm
Weight P220 / P225
approx. 4 Kg
*
*
( )
( )
*
( )
b Weight
All dimensions in mm
NRJED112402EN
*
( )
For P220/P225 with RTD option,
add + 8 mm to the length
147
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P220 / P225
Base Unit
(cont.)
Front panel description
Upper flap
2
Backlit display device
3 x 16 characters
3
Trip LED
4
Alarm LED
5
Warning LED
6
Power LED
7
Programmable LEDs
8
2 touch-sensitive buttons to read and
acknowledge alarm messages
9
Parameterisation and setting keypad
3
8
4
9
5
6
7
10 RS232 port
11 Lower flap (removed)
10
11
Rear panel description
3
1
Connector 1
2
Connector 2
3
OPTION P2/P3
1
2
PM103545
3
1
1
PM103538
2
The rear face of the MiCOM P220 / P225 relays
comprises at least 2 connectors.
The relays may have (optional) :
b two green connectors dedicated to the connection of
6 temperature RTD sensors (for P220) and 10
temperature RTD (for P225)
148
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
(cont.)
DM101199EN
P220: Advice for external connections
The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT
7
5
Auxiliary
voltage
Watch dog (4)
Programmable
tripping output
relay
Phase rotation
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
5
1(P2)
2(P2)
3(P2)
6
Programmable input L1
Programmable input L2
Programmable input L3
Programmable input L4
1(P3)
2(P3)
3(P3)
4(P2)
5(P2)
6(P2)
4(P3)
5(P3)
6(P3)
7(P2)
8(P2)
9(P2)
7(P3)
8(P3)
9(P3)
Programmable input L5
3
(P2)
(P3)
(P2)
(P3)
(P2)
(P3)
Programmable input L6
Case earth
connection
*
MiCOM
P220
Communication
port RS485
*
: Link terminals 30 and 32 if the relay
is connected at the end of the RS485 bus
(pcb type)
P220
ADVICE for CONNECTION:
b A tightening torque of 1.3 newton is recommended for all screws fitted to the
MIDOS terminal blocks.
b Functionning temperature limited to 55°C.
b For any connection use the provided kit or use cable terminals UL LISTED.
b Wiring; use copper conductors onlysize AWG22 to AWG10.
NRJED112402EN
149
MiCOM P220 / P225
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
(cont.)
DM101215EN
P225: Advice for external connections
The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT
7
Phase CTs
5
Watch dog (4)
Programmable
tripping output
relay
Programmable
output relay
Phase rotation
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
Programmable
output relay
3
1(P2)
2(P2)
3(P2)
1(P3)
2(P3)
3(P3)
4(P2)
5(P2)
6(P2)
4(P3)
5(P3)
6(P3)
7(P2)
8(P2)
9(P2)
Programmable input L1
Programmable input L2
7(P3)
8(P3)
9(P3)
10(P2)
11(P2)
12(P2)
10(P3)
11(P3)
12(P3)
13(P2)
14(P2)
15(P2)
13(P3)
14(P3)
15(P3)
Programmable input L3
Programmable input L4
Programmable input L5
Programmable input L6
*
MiCOM
P225
(P2)
(P3)
(P2)
(P3)
(P2)
(P3)
(P2)
(P3)
(P2)
(P3)
Case earth
connection
Communication
port RS485
*
: Link terminals 30 and 32 if the relay
is connected at the end of the RS485 bus
(pcb type)
P225
ADVICE for CONNECTION:
b A tightening torque of 1.3 newton is recommended for all screws fitted to the
MIDOS terminal blocks.
b Functionning temperature limited to 55°C.
b For any connection use the provided kit or use cable terminals UL LISTED.
b Wiring; use copper conductors onlysize AWG22 to AWG10.
150
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Fast feeder differential protection relays
description
PM100520
The MiCOM P521 relay provides high-speed two-ended current differential unit
protection of overhead lines and underground cables in applications such as ring
mains and parallel feeders. The integration of many protection functions allows
application to a wide range of power systems, providing both local and remote
backup protection.
Optimum phase selection is assured, as the scheme measures the currents entering
and leaving the protected plant zone. Fast tripping results for an internal fault, with
stability for any out-of-zone fault
The signalling interface options support metallic, direct fibre optic and multiplexed
digital links. As digital communication is used, long distances between scheme ends
can be achieved, and the signalling channel is monitored continuously.
Tripping uses a proven characteristic comparing differential current with through
current. Phase differential elements of this type offer consistent detection of solid
and resistive faults, with optimum faulted phase selection, tripping, and indication.
MiCOM P521: A full suite of protection and
control standard functions, which makes
current differential protection available
over pilot wires.
A full range of back-up protection is integrated. This enhances the dependability of
the protection, as hot-standby elements such as overcurrent can be brought into
service whenever a signalling channel outage may occur.
Application
b Highly selective unit protection
The MiCOM P521 current differential scheme provides a comprehensive protection
package, primarily designed for unit protection of overhead and underground
feeders up to and including distribution voltage levels.
b Variety of end-to-end communications interface
options
The P521 is limited to three pole tripping only and is suitable for cable applications
where no auto-reclosing is required.
b Integrated back-up elements can run as hot
standby in the event of comms channel outage
The MiCOM P521 is supplied with a full suite of protection and control functions as
standard.
Customer benefits
Current differential protection by its nature requires few protection settings, and for
most applications the factory default settings can be used - the P521 relay as
supplied is ready to protect!
b 8 boolean logic equations
b 4 programmable inter-trip commands
Transformer Applications
Figure 1 shows a protected line and transformer “unit”. The P521 compensates for
the vector group shift and zero sequence filtering effects of the in-zone transformer.
Second harmonic restraint is used to stabilize the protection against magnetizing
inrush currents.
DM101201EN
Where transformer loads are tapped off the protected line, it is not essential to install
CTs at the tap. There exists the facility to time grade the differential protection with
downstream relays or fuses.
P521
P521
Fig.1 : P521 in-zone transformer application
NRJED112402EN
151
3
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Ratings
Inputs and Outputs Ratings
Power Supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx
24 – 60 Vdc
24 - 250 Vdc, 48 – 240 Vac
Operating range
DC: ± 20% AC: – 20%, +10%
Residual ripple
12%
Stored energy time
50 ms
Burden
3 W Standby + 0.4 W per Energized Relay + 10 mA per logic input
6 VA Standby + 0.4 VA per Energized Relay + 10 mA per logic input
Frequency
3
Nominal frequency
50 or 60 Hz by setting selection
Range
Nominal ± 5 Hz
Current inputs
Phase current inputs
1 and 5A by connection
Earth current inputs
1 and 5A by connection
b <0.025 VA (1 A)
b <0.3 VA (5 A)
b <0.008 VA at 0.1e (1 A)
b <0.01 VA for 0.1e (5 A)
b 1s @ 100 x Rated Current with 400 A Maximum
b 2s @ 40 x Rated Current
b Continuous @ 4 x Rated Current
Burden Phase Current
Burden Earth Current
Thermal withstand
Output Relay
Contact rating
Contact relay
Dry contact Ag CdO
Make current
30 Amps and carry for 3 s
Carry capacity
5 Amps continuous
Rated Voltage
250Vac
Breaking characteristic
b 135 Vdc, 0.3 Amps (L/R=30 ms)
b 250 Vdc, 50 W resistive or 25 W inductive (L/R=40 ms)
b 220 Vac, 5 Amps (cos =0.6)
b 135 Vdc, 0.3A (L/R = 30 ms)
b 250 Vdc, 50W resistive or 25W inductive (L/R=40ms)
Breaking capacity AC
Breaking capacity DC
Operation time
<7ms
Durability
Loaded contact
>100 000 Operations
Unloaded contact
>100 000 Operations
Relay auxiliary power
supply
Logic Inputs
Nominal
voltage range Vx
Operating voltage
range
Nominal
Voltage range
Minimal
polarisation
voltage
Maximum
polarisation
current
Holding current
after 2 ms
b 24 – 250 Vdc
b 24 – 240 Vac
b 19.2 – 300 Vdc
b 38.4 – 264 Vac
b 24 – 250 Vdc
b 24 – 240 Vac
b 19.2 Vdc
b 19.2 Vac
35 mA
2.3 mA
152
Maximum
continuous
withstand
b 300 Vdc
b 264 Vac
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
Functional overview
(Description of ANSI code nos., see Protection Functions Table)
Rear
Port 1
DM101208EN
Front port
Setting
Software S1
EIA (RS485) port
To setting software S1
To SCADA system
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
MEASUREMENTS
b CB local/Remote
b True RMS measured values
b Phase Current Rotation
b Phase Currents
b CB Monitoring
b Neutral currents
b Cold Load Pick Up
b Sequence currents
b Trip Circuit Supervision
b Trip Circuit Supervision
b Blocking Logic
b Bias & Differential currents
b Selective Scheme Logic
b Remote currents
b Relay maintenance Mode
b Peak & rolling demand values
b Remote ctrl on output relays
b Communication statistics
b Auxiliary timers
b Self monitoring
RECORDING
FEATURES
Fault records
25
Event Recording
250
Disturbance
Recording
5
b IRIG-B synchronization
b Boolean logic equations
3
87
50/51
50 N
51 N
37
46
46BC
49
50BF
Fast feeder differential protection relay
MiCOM P521
Protection Functions Overview
P521
Protection Functions Overview
P521
37
Undercurrent detection

Intertripping (Direct, Permissive and Current differential)

46
Negative phase sequence
overcurrent

Propagation delay compensation

46BC
Broken conductor detection

3 Pole tripping only

49
Thermal overload

Fibre optic or metallic signalling channels

50BF
Circuit breaker failure

Supervision of protection signalling channel

Non-directional phase overcurrent
protection
Interchangeable protection signalling interface

50/51

Vector Compensation (all vector groups)


50N/51N
Non-directional earth fault protection

Ratio Correction
86
Output relay latching

Inrush restraint (menu selectable)

87P
Phase segregated current
differential protection

Circuit breaker control

Circuit breaker monitoring

CBF
Circuit breaker fail protection

Blocking logic

CTS
Current transformer supervision

Selective logic

TCS
Trip circuit supervision

5 optically isolated inputs

CLPU
Cold load pick-up protection for
phase and E/F protection

8 output relays + watchdog output relay

4 fixed function LEDs and 4 programmable LEDs

Front EIA(RS)232 communication port (Modbus)

Rear EIA(RS)485 communication port (choice of protocol)

8 Boolean logic equations

NRJED112402EN
153
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
(cont.)
Main functions
Differential Protection (87P)
The primary protection element in the P521 relay is true, phase-segregated current
differential protection. The measurement algorithm is extremely reliable, offering fast
detection of internal faults, and stability for external faults.
The differential algorithm has a dual slope percentage bias restraint, as shown in
Figure 2.
DM101202EN
An internal fault will generate differential current.
I diff = I 1 + I 2
3
I1
I2
Operate
Percentage
bias k2
Fig.2 : Biased Current Differential Protection
I s1
Percentage
bias k1
I s2
Restrain
I bias
=
I1 + I2
2
The bias current is that which merely flows through the protected unit, as a load or
through-fed external fault. The initial slope (k1) ensures sensitivity to low current
faults, whereas the k2 slope is raised to counter the effects of current transformer
saturation mismatch.
When a trip is issued by the differential element, in addition to tripping the local
breakers, the P521 sends a current differential intertrip signal to the remote end. This
will ensure tripping of both ends of the protected line.
CT Ratio and Vector Correction
Where line CT ratios at either end of the protected feeder are different, the P521
contains a settable correction factor to compensate for the mismatch.
In applications with in-zone transformers, the P521 compensates for the vector
group shift and zero sequence filtering effects of the in-zone transformer, so no
external interposing CTs are required.
Inrush Restraint / Blocking
Second harmonic restraint is used to stabilize the protection against magnetizing
inrush currents during transformer energisation. Alternatively, user can select the
blocking mode which will block differential from tripping when the second hamonic
component exceeds the setting.
154
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P521
Protection functions
(cont.)
Overcurrent (50/51) and Earth Fault Protection (50N/51N)
The overcurrent and earth fault protection is provided as a form of back-up
protection. The P521 has four stages of overcurrent and four stages of earth fault
protection. The first two stages have an IDMT or definite time (DT) characteristic.
The third and fourth stages are DT only. The overcurrent and earth fault protection
can be either permanently enabled or disabled, or alternatively enabled upon failure
of the differential protection communication channel. A wide range of IEC and IEEE/
ANSI curves are available.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (46)
Negative sequence overcurrent protection can be used to provide greater sensitivity
to resistive phase to phase or phase to earth faults even with delta transformers
present. The negative sequence element can also be used to provide efficient
back-up protection for dedicated motor protection relays.
Broken Conductor Detection (46BC)
The broken conductor protection element detects unbalanced conditions caused by
broken conductors, maloperation of single phase switchgear or single phasing
conditions.
Undercurrent Protection (37)
The P521 provides undercurrent detection that can be used to provide loss of mains
protection.
Thermal Overload (49)
Transformers and cables must be protected to account for their particular thermal
characteristics. The MiCOM P521 relay includes a thermal overload element based
upon the true RMS value of the current. Alarm and overload thresholds are fully
programmable to match each device requirement.
Cold Load Pickup
When a feeder is energised after a long outage most connected devices will draw a
significant inrush current. The inrush current may be greater than the overcurrent or
earth fault settings thus causing mal-operation. To prevent unwanted tripping the
P521 has a cold load pickup function that automatically increases the overcurrent
settings for a selectable time. Following a successful close the settings revert back
to their normal values.
Protection signalling
Interfacing Options
The MiCOM P521 relay is designed to ensure compatibility with a wide range of
communication equipment and media. It is supplied fitted with one of the following
protection signalling interfaces (order option):
bb 1300nm single-mode fibre
bb EIA(RS)485 electrical
These interfaces allow a variety of signalling links to be used, as shown in Figure 3
and summarised below. Signalling bandwidths of 9.6 / 19.2 / 56 / 64 kbps are
available, subject to the type of link used.
NRJED112402EN
155
3
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
DM101203EN
(cont.)
P521
P521
a) Direct link using optical fibres
Interface
Unit
P521
Other protection and
telecommunications
equipment
PCM
MUX
b) Multiplexed link - relay connected to a remote PCM multiplexer
using optical fibres and via Interface Units
1.2 km max.
MT RS485
P521
P521
c) Direct EIA485 connection with MT RS485 surge protection device
(Scheme A)
P521
Interface
Unit
10 km max.
Interface
Unit
3
MT RS485
Fig.3 : Protection Signalling options
P521
d) EIA485 connection via Interface Units
(with optional PCM-FLU isolating transformers) - (Schemes F,G)
P521
Baseband
or
mDSL
Modem
10 km max.
Baseband
or
mDSL
Modem
P521
e) pilot wire communications via leased line or mDSL modem
(with optional PCM-FLU isolating transformers) - (Schemes D,E)
P521
Leased
Line
Modem
No strict limits
Leased
Line
Modem
P521
f) Conditioned telephone line communications via suitable modems
(Schemes B,C)
Where 4 wire unconditioned twisted-pair metallic pilots are available, distances up to
25km can be achieved using Interface Units. For distances less than 1.2km, direct 4
wire EIA(RS)485 connection can be used.
For 2 or 4 wire unconditioned twisted-pair metallic pilots, options for other modems
exist, allowing distances up to 18km to be achieved.
For 2 wire conditioned pilots (provided by a telecommunications company), a
suitable type of modem must be used, and there is no strict limit to the distance.
For connection to multiplexer equipment, electrical interfaces conforming to the
G.703, V.35, and X.21 recommendations are available, by using the 850nm fibre
interface in the P521.
In direct fibre optic applications, the distance achievable depends on the type of fibre
interface:
bb 1300nm single-mode
Typical fibre run: 100 km
The P521 protection signalling interface is interchangeable, which allows simple
upgrade without the need for any software changes.
156
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
(cont.)
Direct Intertripping
DM101204EN
A typical application of the user defined direct intertripping facility is shown in
Figure 4.
X
X
Fig.4 : Example Application of Direct Intertripping
P521
P521
Transformer
protection
DTT=1
Data message
-
+
-
Opto
+
Using the selective Intertrip settings, either a user-configurable input or an internal
status signal can be assigned for this purpose. Upon receipt of this message the
remote relay will operate user specified outputs for direct transfer tripping or
blocking, and provide indication of the remote intertrip. The indication can be
disabled then it acts as signal transfer function.
Permissive Intertripping
There is an auxiliary signalling facility whereby
a permissive intertrip command is sent over the protection communication channel.
A user configurable input can be assigned for this purpose. When energised, the
communication message to the remote relay is modified. Upon receipt of this
message, and providing one or more currents are above the differential setting (Is1),
the remote relays will initiate a trip, operate the user defined outputs and provide an
indication of the remote intertrip. If required the current checking can be disabled
thus enabling the permissive intertrip feature to operate as a second direct intertrip
function. The indication can be disabled then it acts as signal transfer function.
Programmable Intertripping
There are 4 independent programmable intertripping signals which can be assigned
with any logic inputs, protection signals and logic equation outputs and transfer
these signals to the remote end relay.
NRJED112402EN
157
3
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P521
Control & Monitoring
Control functions
Independent Protection Setting Groups
By virtue of its two setting groups, the MiCOM P521 relay allows for the protection of
dual-speed motors as well as motors operating under environmental or operational
conditions, which are not constant over time. A change of setting group can be useful
following a change in source impedance. The result is improved selectivity.
Circuit Breaker Control
Circuit breaker control is available from the front panel user interface, optically
isolated inputs and remotely via the substation communications.
CB Monitoring
Preventive CB maintenance is provided by monitoring summated contact breaking
duty, the number of switching operations and the opening time. If a pre-set threshold
is exceeded, the P521 relay will generate an alarm signal.
3
Programmable Inputs and Outputs
The MiCOM P521 relay includes 5 logic inputs and 9 logic outputs including a
watch-dog. All inputs and outputs are freely configurable, with the exception of RLY1
which is a dedicated trip relay. RLY1 and RLY2 outputs are changeover contacts,
typically used for tripping.
All programmed thresholds (time delayed or instantaneous) can be easily routed to
any of the outputs.
Blocking Logic
When the MiCOM P521 relay is used on critical networks, management of protection
relays must take surrounding devices into consideration.
Blocking inputs can be configured independently from each other to block any
combination of the user selected elements (e.g. current differential, thermal
overload, overcurrent etc.).
Selective Relay Scheme Logic
A dedicated input can temporarily alter the overcurrent and earth fault time-delay
settings in response to a downstream phase/earth fault start condition. This function
allows the MiCOM relay to discriminate correctly when used in a cascade scheme.
The selective relay scheme logic function can be enabled or disabled by the user as
required.
Output Relay Latching
Any of the outputs, including trip, can be latched. Reset of the outputs is possible
from a logic input, the front panel user interface or through the remote
communications.
Boolean Logic Equations
A total of 8 logic equations are available, each with 16 variables. The variables can
be logic input, protection signals, output of other equations, etc.
158
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P521
Control & Monitoring
(cont.)
Measurements & post fault analysis
Event Recording
Up to 250 events are stored in the MiCOM P521 relay’s Flash memory. Events
include the change in state of inputs/outputs and presence of any alarms. All events
are time-tagged to 1ms.
Fault Records
Records of the last 25 faults are stored in Flash memory. The information provided in
the fault record includes:
bb Indication of faulted phase
bb Protection flags
bb Active setting group
bb Local phase and neutral currents
bb Differential currents
bb Maximum bias current
3
bb Communications channel status
bb Fault time and date
Disturbance Recording
A total of 5 disturbance records can be stored with 15 seconds in total duration. The
disturbance recorder function is triggered by any of the programmable thresholds, by
an external input, or via the remote communications. The data is stored in memory
and can be transferred to a data analyser using the front communication port or the
rear EIA(RS)485 port.
Instantaneous Records
Five instantaneous (start) records can be stored in the MiCOM P521 relay. Each
instantaneous record includes:
bb Start time (date & duration)
bb Origin (phase & earth threshold)
These records are intended to aid preventative maintenance.
Measurements
General Measurements
bb Local and remote phase currents
bb Local neutral current
bb Phase differential currents
bb Phase bias currents
bb Sequence currents
bb Thermal state
bb Peak and rolling demand values
Protection Signalling Supervision
Dependable communications are essential for high-performance differential
protection. The MiCOM P521 monitors the protection signalling channel, and reports
the following error statistics in line with the guidance from ITU-T G.821.
bb Channel propagation delay
bb Channel status
bb Number of valid messages
bb Number of errored messages
bb Number of errored seconds
bb Number of severely errored seconds
NRJED112402EN
159
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Control & Monitoring
(cont.)
Plant supervision
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
If the fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit
breaker trip initiation, the P521 can be configured to initiate a circuit breaker failure
(CBF) condition. CBF operation can be used to backtrip upstream breakers or
remove blocking signals from upstream relays.
Circuit Breaker Supervision and
Monitoring
The MiCOM P521 relay provides advanced circuit breaker monitoring features. The
relay monitors the operating and closing times of the CB to ensure that they do not
exceed adjustable thresholds. The state of the circuit breaker is also monitored by
use of the CB auxiliary contacts.
If the relay detects the circuit breaker contacts in the same state for more than 5
seconds the relay will initiate an alarm. During faults, I and I2 values are summed
and memorised for each phase.
The MiCOM P521 relay also provides Trip Circuit Supervision via a user definable
input. Any break in the trip circuit will be accompanied by an alarm.
3
Current Transformer Supervision
This innovative CTS function can detect a CT failure by comparing the load currents
and unbalanced currents of local and remote end. Upon the detection of a CT failure,
the negative sequence overcurrent, undercurrent and broken conductor protection
will be inhibited. The differential protection can be restrained upon the setting.
Information interfaces
Information exchange is performed via the LCD, the local PC interface and via the
rear communications interface.
Local Communication
The front EIA(RS)232 port has been designed for use with MiCOM S1, providing the
ability to programme the settings (on or off-line), configure the relay, extract and view
records, view the measurement information dynamically and perform control
functions.
Remote Communication
The rear communication port is based upon EIA(RS)485 voltage levels and is
designed for permanent connection to network control and data acquisition systems
(see Figure 5). One of the three protocols listed below should be selected at the time
of order:
bb Modbus
DM101205EN
bb IEC 60870-5-103
Local
User
Interface
Fig. 5 : Connect to Control System
Data logger
Modbus
TM
protocol
160
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P521
Setting ranges
Protection functions setting ranges
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
[37] Undercurrent
Ι< ?
Yes, No
Ι< 0.02 Ιn
1 Ιn
0.01 Ιn
tΙ<
0s
150 s
0.01 s
40 Ιn
0.01 Ιn
150 s
0.01 s
[46] Negative Sequence Overcurrent
Ι2> ?
Yes, No
Ι2>
0.1 Ιn
Ι2> Delay Type
DMT, IDMT, RI
tΙ2>
0s
Ι2> Curve
IEC STI, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI, CO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI
Ι2> Tms
0.025
1.5
0.025
Ι2> Time Dial
0.1
100
0.1
K
0.1
10
0.005
Reset Type
DMT
IDMT
N/A
tReset
40 ms
100 s
0.01 s
Rtms
0.025
3.2
0.025
Ι2>> ?
Yes, No
Ι2>>
0.1 Ιn
40 Ιn
0.01 Ιn
tΙ2>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
0.01 Ιn
3
[49] Thermal Overload
Therm OL
Yes, No
Ι >
0.1 Ιn
3.2 Ιn
Te
1 mn
200 mn
1 mn
K
1
1.5
0.01
Trip
50%
200%
1%
Alarm ?
Yes, No
Alarm
50%
200%
1%
25 Ιn
0.01 Ιn
150 s
0.01 s
[50/51] Phase Overcurrent
Ι>?
Yes, No, Backup
Ι>
0.1 Ιn
Ι> Delay Type
DMT, ΙDMT, RΙ
tΙ>
0s
Ι> Curve
ΙEC STΙ, ΙEC SΙ, ΙEC VΙ, ΙEC EΙ, ΙEC LTΙ, CO2, ΙEEE MΙ, CO8, ΙEEE VΙ, ΙEEE EΙ
Ι> Tms
0.025
1.5
0.025
Ι> Time Dial
0.1
100
0.1
K
0.1
10
0.005
Reset Type
DMT
ΙDMT
N/A
tReset
40 ms
100 s
0.01 s
Rtms
0.025
3,2
0.025
Ι> ?
Yes, No, Backup
Ι>>
0.5 Ιn
40 Ιn
0.05 Ιn
{Remaining Ι>> cells are identical to Ι> above}
Ι>>> ?
Yes, No, Backup
Ι>>>
0.5 Ιn
40 Ιn
0.05 Ιn
tΙ>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Ι>>>> ?
Yes, No, Backup
Ι>>>>
0.5 Ιn
40 Ιn
0.05 Ιn
tΙ>>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
NRJED112402EN
161
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P521
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
bb 0.1 Ιen*
bb 25 Ιen*
bb 0.01 Ιen*
bb 0.01 Ιen**
bb 1 Ιen**
bb 0.005 Ιen**
bb 0.002 Ιen***
bb 1 Ιen***
bb 0.001 Ιen***
150 s
0.01 s
[50N/51N] Earth Fault
Ιe>?
Yes, No, Backup
Ιe>
3
Ιe> Delay Type
DMT, ΙDMT, RΙ, LABOR
tΙe>
0s
Ιe> Curve
ΙEC STΙ, ΙEC SΙ, ΙEC VΙ, ΙEC EΙ, ΙEC LTΙ CO2, ΙEEE MΙ, CO8,ΙEEE EΙ; 1, 2, 3
Ιe> Tms
0.025
1.5
0.025
Ιe> Time Dial
0.1
100
0.1
K
0.1
10
0.005
Reset Type
DMT
ΙDMT
N/A
tReset
40 ms
100 s
0.01 s
Rtms
0.025
3.2
0.025
bb 0.5 Ιen*
bb 40 Ιen*
bb 0.01 Ιen*
bb 0.01 Ι en**
bb 8 Ιen**
bb 0.005 Ιen**
bb 0.002 Ιen***
bb 1 Ιen***
Ιe>> ?
Yes, No, Backup
Ιe>>
bb 0.001 Ιen***
{Remaining Ιe>> cells are identical to Ιe> above}
Ι e>>> ?
Yes, No, Backup
Ιe>>>
tΙe>>>
Ι e>>>> ?
bb 0.5 Ιen*
bb 40 Ιen*
bb 0.01 Ιen*
bb 0.01 Ιen**
bb 8 Ιen**
bb 0.005 Ιen**
bb 0.002 Ιen***
bb 1 Ιen***
bb 0.001 Ιen***
0s
150 s
0.01 s
bb 0.5 Ιen*
bb 40 Ιen*
bb 0.01 Ιen*
bb 0.01 Ιen**
bb 8 Ιen**
bb 0.005 Ιen**
bb 0.002 Ιen***
bb 1 Ιen***
bb 0.001 Ιen***
0s
150 s
0.01s
Yes, No, Backup
Ιe>>>>
tΙe>>>>
* standard earth fault board (0.1 to 40 Ιen) / ** sensitive earth fault board (0.01 to 8 Ιen) / *** very sensitive earth fault board (0.002 to 1 Ιen)
[87] Current Differential
Current Diff ?
No
Yes
N/A
Ιs1
0.1 Ιn
2 Ιn
0.05 Ιn
Ιs2
1Ιn
30 Ιn
0.05 Ιn
k1
0%
150%
5%
k2
30%
150%
5%
ΙDiff Delay Type
DMT
ΙDMT
N/A
tΙdiff
0s
150s
0.01s
ΙDiff Curve
ΙEC STΙ, ΙEC SΙ, ΙEC VΙ, ΙEC EΙ, ΙEC LTΙ, CO2, ΙEEE MΙ, CO8, ΙEEE VΙ
ΙDiff Tms
0.025
1.5
0.025
ΙDiff Time Dial
0.1
100
0.1
PΙT Time
0.05s
2s
0.01s
PΙT Ι Disable
No
Yes
N/A
PΙT Ι Selection
Local
Remote
N/A
{Remaining Ι>> cells are identical to Ι> above}
0.1 s
5s
0.05 s
DIT Rx tDwell
No
Yes
N/A
DIT Alarm
No
Yes
N/A
PIT Alarm
No
Yes
N/A
Inrush Restraint
4 Ιn
Yes
N/A
High Set
3
32 Ιn
0.01 Ιn
Kr
5%
20
1
Harmonic Ratio
No
50%
N/A
Transient Bias
Yes or No
162
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P521
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Automation functions setting ranges
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
Cold Load PU
tΙ>?
Yes or No
tΙ>>?
Yes or No
tΙ>>>?
Yes or No
tΙ>>>>?
Yes or No
tΙe>?
Yes or No
tΙe>>?
Yes or No
tΙe>>>?
Yes or No
tΙe>>>>
Yes or No
tΙ2>?
Yes or No
tΙ2>>?
Yes or No
tThermΙ
Yes or No
Level
20%
500%
1%
tCL
0.1 s
3600 s
0.1 s
Phase CT Primary
1
9999
1
Earth CT Primary
1
9999
1
Phase CT Secondary
1
5
Earth CT Secondary
1
5
CT Correction Factor
0.05
10.0
Earth Current
Residual Connection or Core Balanced CT
(preferred in isolated and compensated neutral systems)
3
CT Data
0.01
CT Supervision
CTS ?
Yes or No
CTS Reset mode
Manual, Auto
CTS Reset RST=[C]
Press key (C) to reset CTS alarm. Visible only when CTS Reset mode is set in Manual.
CTS I1>
0.050 In
4 In
0.01 In
CTS I2/I1>
5%
100%
5%
CTS I2/I1>>
5%
100%
5%
CTS TIME DLY
0s
10 s
0.01 s
CTS Restrain?
Yes or No
10 s
50 ms
150 s
0.01 s
Trip Circuit Supervision
TC Supervision ?
Yes or No
tSUP
100 ms
Logic Select. 1 (2)
Sel1 tΙ>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tΙ>>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tΙ>>>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tΙe>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tΙe>>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tΙe>>>>
Yes or No
tsel1
0s
Auxiliary timers
Number
2 independent associated to the Logic Inputs Aux 1 and Aux2
tAux1 & tAux2
0s
NRJED112402EN
200 s
0.01 s
163
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P521
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
Latch Functions
3
Latch Ιdiff
Yes or No
Latch Direct I-Trip
Yes or No
Latch C Diff I-Trip
Yes or No
Latch PIT
Yes or No
Latch tΙ>
Yes or No
Latch tΙ>>
Yes or No
Latch tΙ>>>
Yes or No
Latch tΙ>>>>
Yes or No
Latch tΙe>
Yes or No
Latch tΙe>>
Yes or No
Latch tΙe>>>
Yes or No
Latch tΙe>>>>
Yes or No
Latch tΙ<
Yes or No
Latch tΙ2>
Yes or No
Latch tΙ2>>
Yes or No
Latch Thermal
Yes or No
Latch Brkn. Cond
Yes or No
Latch t Aux 1
Yes or No
Latch t Aux 2
Yes or No
Blocking Logic 1 (2)
Block Ιdiff
Yes or No
Block tΙ>
Yes or No
Block tΙ>>
Yes or No
Block tΙ>>>
Yes or No
Block tΙ>>>>
Yes or No
Block tΙe>
Yes or No
Block tΙe>>
Yes or No
Block tΙe>>>
Yes or No
Block tΙe>>>>
Yes or No
Block tΙ2>
Yes or No
Block tΙ2>>
Yes or No
Block Therm
Yes or No
Block Brkn. Cond
Yes or No
Block t Aux 1
Yes or No
Block t Aux 2
Yes or No
Recording functions setting ranges
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
3s
0.1 s
Disturbance Recorder
Pre-Time
0.1 s
Note: From V12.A the Post-Time setting cell is removed from setting
Post-Time
0.1 s
Disturb Rec Trig
ON INST, ON TRIP
164
3s
0.1 s
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
Presentation
User-Machine Interface (HMI) - Front Plate and Menus
PM103538
All the relay’s parameters, ie., protection functions, logic controls, communication,
LEDs, inputs and outputs, can be programmed and modified by push-buttons
located on the front panel. A 2 x 16 alphanumeric backli LCD screen displays all the
relay’s data (settings, measurements, etc.).
The menus are designed so that the user can move around them easily, without
confusion. The user will soon be at ease with the Human-Machine Interface.
Working language
The following languages can be settable in most of the relays:
b French, English, Spanish, Portuguese, Turkish, Polish, Russian, Chinese, Dutch,
German, Italian, Czech, Hungarian and Greek.
Wiring
The individual equipment is delivered with sufficient M4 screws and washers to
connect the relay via insulated crimp/pressure ring terminals. The maximum number
of insulated crimp/pressure ring terminations, per terminal block terminal shall be
two.
If necessary, Schneider Electric can provide 3 types of suitable insulated crimp/
pressure terminals (see below) according to the cross sectional area of the wire and
the type of terminal. Each reference corresponds to a sachet of 100 terminals.
Communication
b EIA(RS)485 Rear Communication Port
The connection of communications is allocated to terminals 29-30-31-32, shown
in the connection diagrams in section P521/EN CO of the P521 Technical Guide.
b EIA(RS)232 Front Communication Port
MiCOM P521 relay provides the user with an EIA(RS)232 communication port.
This link is dedicated to the MiCOM Setting software MiCOM S1.
A standard EIA(RS)232 shielded cable should be used to connect the P521 front
EIA(RS)232 port to a PC. The connecter on the P521 side must be male in gender.
Type Port
Physical Link
Connectors
Data Rate
Protocol
RS485
Rear port
Screened twisted pair
Screws or snap-on
b 300 to 38400 baud
(programmable)
b ModBusTM RTU
b IEC60870-5-103
RS232
Front port
Screened twisted cable
PC: 9 pin D-type male
connector
b 19200 Baud
(Asynchronous)
b ModBusTM RTU
P521: Sub–D 9 pin
female connectorr
NRJED112402EN
165
3
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P521
Base Unit
(cont.)
Dimensions & weight
The MiCOM P521 relay is available in a MiCOM size
30TE metal case for panel or flush mounting.
Dimensions
b Height
177mm
b Width
154,2 mm (30TE)
b Depth
247,1 mm
DM101206EN
Case
Weight
b Weight
approx. 4 Kg
All dimensions in mm
3
166
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P521
Base Unit
(cont.)
Front panel description
1
2 x 16 alphanumeric backlit display
2
Trip LED
3
Alarm LED
4
Warning LED
5
Healthy LED
6
Programmable LEDs
7
2 tactile button keypad for reading and clearing
alarms and messages
8
5 tactile button keypad for setting and consulting
9
EAI (RS232) port
PM103538
1
2
7
3
8
4
5
3
6
9
NRJED112402EN
167
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
(cont.)
P521: Advice for external connections
DM101207EN
External connections - with fiber optic communications
Phase rotation
MiCOM
P521
Watchdog contact
Relay 1
MiCOM
P521
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
3
Relay 5
Relay 6
Relay 7
Relay 8
Case earth
connection
Comms cable screen
AC / DC
supply
Vx
EAI(RS)485
communications port
Opto 1
Opto 2
Opto 3
(pcb type)
resistorfor the last relay
* Terminating
to be connected betweeen 30 -32
168
Opto 4
TX1
RX1
Fibre Optic communication
TX1
RX1
Opto 5
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P521
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
(cont.)
P521: Advice for external connections
DM101209EN
External connections - with direct EIA(RS)485 communications
Phase rotation
MiCOM
P521
MiCOM
P521
Watchdog contact
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
3
Relay 5
Relay 6
Relay 7
Relay 8
Case earth
connection
AC / DC
supply
Vx
Comms cable screen
EAI(RS)485
communications port
Opto 1
RS485
Opto 2
Opto 3
(pcb type)
resistorfor the last relay
* Terminating
to be connected betweeen 30 -32
NRJED112402EN
Opto 4
MT RS485
MT RS485
SK1
RS485
SK1
1.2 Km max.
Opto 5
169
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Voltage and Frequency protection relays
description
PM100516
MiCOM P92x range of relays provide reliable and high performance voltage and
frequency protection.
Versatile application and integration of protection functions with automation, control
and measurement functions, combined with reduced maintenance, makes P92x
relays an optimal and innovative choice.
A friendly, multi-lingual user interface with programmable LEDs and boolean logic
equation, allows for simple and flexible applications on any type of network.
Connecting the relay to virtually any kind of Digital Control System or SCADA is
made possible by the wide range of updated communication protocols provided in
P92x.
Application
The MiCOM P92x relays provide fast and accurate protection for use in numerous
applications requiring voltage and frequency based protection elements. To suit
different application needs and provide optimum solution, following models are
available:
3
MiCOM P92x:
b Optimized solution to provide efficient
protection
b Flexible communication and powerful
post fault analysis tools.
Customer benefits
b Frequency measurement accuracy better than
0.01Hz
b Option of multiple communication protocols
b Boolean logic equations
b Housed in a compact case
P921:
Voltage protection, 2 logic inputs, 4 outputs.
P922:
Voltage and frequency protection, event and fault records, disturbance recorder, 5
logic inputs, and 8 output contacts.
P923:
Voltage and frequency protection (plus the rate of change of frequency element df/
dt, and rate of change of voltage U/ T), event and fault records, disturbance
recorder, 5 logic inputs, 8 output contacts.
Integrated with 3 independent phase over voltage and phase under voltage
thresholds, MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays provide effective voltage protection
for typical applications like protection of motors, generators, etc. The configurable
detection logic (AND, OR) can also indicate the absence of voltage, when the under
voltage protection is used.
The 3 zero-sequence over voltage thresholds available in P921, P922 & P923 relays
can be applied:
bb to detect earth faults at the neutral point of generators, as the relays are
insensitive to the 3rd harmonics
bb to detect earth faults in high impedance earthed or isolated electrical systems .
The negative sequence over voltage protection provided by the P922 and P923
relays is designed to detect unbalanced conditions it could therefore be used for
motor, in which any unbalance will lead to overheating and damage.
The P922 and P923 relays integrate 6 frequency thresholds programmable as under
or over frequency, which can be used for automated load shedding/load restoration.
In addition, the P923 relays provide:
bb 6 thresholds of instantaneous Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt) or average
measurements over a settable time interval.
bb 4 thresholds of U/ T function to be used for automated load shedding/load
restoration.
170
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
MiCOM series 20
Ratings
Inputs and Outputs Ratings
Power Supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx
b 24 -250 Vdc
b 24 – 240 Vac
Operating range
b 19.2 – 300 Vdc
b 19.2 – 264 Vac
Residual ripple
12%
Stored energy time
50 ms
Burden
3 W (with 50% of the optos energized and one relay per card energized)
Frequency
Nominal value 50Hz
Operating range 40 – 60 Hz
Nominal value 60 Hz
Operating range 50 – 70 Hz
Output Relay
Contact rating
Contact relay
Dry contact Ag NI
Make current
30 Amps and carry for 3 s
Carry capacity
5 Amps continuous
Rated Voltage
250Vac
3
Breaking characteristic
Breaking capacity AC
b 1500VA resistive
b 1500VA inductive (cos
Breaking capacity DC
b 50W resistive
b 25W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
Operation time
<7ms
=0.5)
Durability
Loaded contact
>10 000 Operations
Unloaded contact
>100 000 Operations
Relay auxiliary power
supply
Logic Inputs
Nominal
voltage range
Vx
Operating
voltage range
Nominal
Voltage range
Minimal
polarisation
voltage
Maximum
polarisation
current
Holding
current after
2 ms
Maximum
continuous
withstand
b 24 – 250 Vdc
b 24 – 240 Vac
b 19.2 – 300 Vdc
b 38.4 – 264 Vac
b 24 – 250 Vdc
b 24 – 240 Vac
b 19,2 Vdc
b 19,2 Vac
b 35 mA
b 2.3 mA
b 300 Vdc
b 264 Vac
NRJED112402EN
171
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
MiCOM series 20
Protection functions
Functional overview
DM101211EN
(Description of ANSI code nos., see Protection Functions Table)
Remote
comm. port
Local
Communication
Disturbance
record
Fault records
Measurements
Self monitoring
59
27
59N
81R
81U/O
27D
V
3
47
Logic
equations
VTS
LEDs
Binary
Input / Output
Frequency & Voltage Relays P92x
All models
ANSI
Function
27/59
Phase under/over voltage (AND & OR mode)
27D
47
59N
Residual over voltage / Derived Vo sequence
overvoltage
VTS/ 60
P921
P922
P923
Settable hysteresis



Remote communication
(RS485 port)



Local communication
(RS232 port)



Digital inputs
2
5
5
Output relays
4
8
8
Event recording
250
250
Fault recording
25
25

Disturbance recording
5
5

Setting groups
2
2
P921
P922
P923



Positive sequence under voltage


Negative sequence overvoltage




Voltage transformer supervision


81U/O
Under/over frequency


81R
Rate of change of Frequency (df/dt+t)

86
Output relay latching
U/


Phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase
voltage protection

Time synchronisation (via digital input)
Logic equation (AND / OR and NOT gates)

VT Supervision








CB Supervision



Configuration depending on the number
and type of voltage transformers



Blocking logic


Under voltage Blocking (settable for P923)
172

T
Function
1


NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Protection functions
(cont.)
Management functions
The protection functions in P92x are complemented with a wide range of control,
measurement, monitoring, post fault analysis and self-diagnostic features to assist
efficient management of the primary system. These include:
bb Boolean logic equation
bb Programmable logic inputs and outputs
bb Fail safe operation
bb Circuit breaker control
bb Output contact latching
bb Circuit breaker status
bb Circuit breaker condition monitoring (in P922 & P923)
bb 2 setting groups (in P922 & P923)
bb True rms phase to phase, phase to neutral and residual voltage measurement.
Zero-sequence overvoltage (59N)
Three thresholds are available: each one can be independently activated or
deactivated. Depending on the VT configuration, MiCOM P921, P922 and P923
relays will operate from the zero sequence voltage, which is calculated internally, or
from the residual voltage, which is measured directly.
A software band-pass filter with an attenuation of 60 dB / decade and centered on
the fundamental frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is provided. The filter can be enabled or
disabled according to the setting.
Configuration depending on the VT
The relays can be used in the following configurations:
bb “3 phase-neutral VTs” or “3 phase-neutral VTs and 1residual VT”:
The voltage protection element can therefore operate either from measured
phase-to-neutral voltages, or from phase-to-phase voltages which have been
internally calculated by the relay. Zero-sequence over voltage protection will
always be available; the presence of the residual VT is designed to display the
true RMS value of the residual voltage,
bb “3 phase-phase VTs and 1 residual VT” or “2 phase-phase VTs and 1 residual VT”:
The voltage protection element can only operate from measured phase-to-phase
voltages. If the residual VT is not connected, the zero-sequence over voltage
protection will not be available.
bb The MiCOM P922 is only designed to operate with the “3 phase-neutral VTs” or
“3 phase-phase VTs” configuration.
NRJED112402EN
173
3
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Protection functions
(cont.)
Voltage protection
For each of the voltage protection function listed below, an instantaneous signal and
a time delayed signal is available for each threshold.
For time-delayed signals, the first threshold of each function (“low threshold”) offers
the choice between a definite timer and an inverse timer, to which a reset timer can
be assigned. The other thresholds only have one definite timer.
In the case of the MiCOM P922, all thresholds have definite time delays and the only
detection logic is the “OR” logic.
Under / Overvoltage (27/59)
Three thresholds are available for each function: each one can be independently
activated or deactivated. If a threshold is activated, it can be configured to detect:
bb an over voltage on the 3 simultaneous phases (logic “AND”) or on at least one of
the phases (logic “OR”) for the “Over voltage” function
bb an under voltage on the 3 simultaneous phases (absence of voltage with the
“AND” logic) or on at least one of the phases (logic “OR”) for the “Under voltage”
function
bb The MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays provide a programmable hysteresis
(drop- out / pick-up ratio) as a percentage of the under voltage and over voltage
pick-up values.
3
bb The P923 provides a settable under voltage block of all the protection and control
elements based on the frequency.
P922 & P923: Negative Sequence Overvoltage (47)
Two thresholds are available: each one can be independently activated or
deactivated. This function is based on the negative-sequence component of the
voltage, which is calculated internally and displayed on the screen of the front panel:
It is designed to detect any voltage unbalance condition.
P922 & P923: Positive Sequence Undervoltage (27D)
Two thresholds are available: each one can be independently activated or
deactivated. This function is based on the positive phase sequence component of
the voltage, which is calculated internally.
Output Relay Latching (86)
Latched outputs can be reset via the activation of a logic input through the front
panel interface or by remote communication
Frequency protections
Frequency protection functions are inhibited below a certain level of the measured
secondary voltage.
The following frequency based protection functions are available.
P922 & P923: Under / Overfrequency (81U/81O)
Six thresholds are available: each one can be configured to detect an under or over
frequency within the range [fn - 10Hz, fn + 10Hz], where fn is the nominal frequency
selected (50Hz or 60Hz). A definite timer is assigned to each threshold.
P923: Rate of Change of Frequency (81R)
Six thresholds are available: each can be configured independently within the range
[-10 Hz/s, +10 Hz/s].
These functions are based on the calculation of the instantaneous rate of change of
frequency over a settable integration time (number of cycles).
P923: U/ T Function
Four thresholds are available: each can be configured independently within the
range [+/-1V, +/-200V] or [+/-4V to +/-720V] for V and [0,1s, 10s] for T.
174
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Protection functions
(cont.)
Boolean logic equation
The MiCOM P921/P922 & P923 relays integrate complete logic equations to allow
customization of the product based on customer application.
Up to 8 independent Boolean equations can be used. Each equation offers the
possibility to use AND, OR & NOT logical gates. Up to 16 parameters can be used
for each equation including any threshold and opto-input status. Every result of
equation can be time delayed, reused in another equation and assigned to any
output relays, trip, trip latching and/ or HMI LEDs.
Each boolean equation result can be alarmed or not.
DM101192EN
Inputs / Outputs / programmable LEDs
All logic inputs, output contacts (excluding the RL0 changeover output contact,
dedicated to the “relay failed” function) and the 4 LEDs of the MiCOM P921, P922
and P923 relays can be programmed. This affects in particular all logic signals
(instantaneous, time delayed) in the relays which can be combined with the different
output contacts and LEDs. The output contacts can also be programmed to be
latched.
Blocking logic
Operation of the different protection elements of P92x can be coordinated with other
devices in the system. Two blocking inputs are independently configurable. When
active, they freeze the associated protection timers and when they drop-off, they
re-impose the initial value if the fault conditions are still present.
Setting groups for protection functions
The MiCOM P922 and P923 relays have two independent setting groups, which can
be used to adapt the protection functions to different operating conditions. The two
groups can be switched by activating a dedicated logic input, or by the operator via
the front panel, or locally (RS232 port) or remotely (RS485 port). The switch from
one setting group to another will only take effect if no protection or automation
functions are running, to prevent unwanted tripping.
NRJED112402EN
175
3
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Control & Monitoring
Measurements
Depending on the configuration of the VTs connected to MiCOM P921, P922 and
P923 relays, the following values will be measured and displayed as true RMS
values on the back-lit screen:
bb phase-to-neutral voltages Ua, Ub, Uc
bb phase-to-phase voltages Uab, Ubc, Uca
bb residual voltage Vo
bb frequency.
In addition, the MiCOM P922 and P923 relays calculate the following values
internally:
bb positive sequence voltage
bb negative sequence voltage
bb peak values of phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltages
bb rolling values of phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltages
All measurements are available locally or remotely.
Logs and records
EM100054EN
All event, fault and disturbance records are time-stamped to 1ms by the internal real
time clock. In the event of a loss of auxiliary power, a lithium battery is used to save
the records, the date and the time. Monitored at regular intervals, the battery can be
easily accessed from the front panel if it has to be replaced.
All records can be retrieved locally, using the MiCOM S1 setting software (RS232
port), or remotely (RS485 port).
Event Records
Any change of state of logic inputs, output contacts or protection functions will be
recorded in the non-volatile memory of the MiCOM P922 and P923 relays, with a
maximum of 250 events. When the memory is full, the oldest events will be deleted,
which will increase the storage capacity for more recent events. Each event can be
retrieved locally to a PC using the MiCOM S1 Studio support software through front
RS232 port or remotely using the rear RS485 port.
Relay setting using MiCOM S1 Studio
Fault Records
The MiCOM P922 and P923 relays can store the last 25 faults that have occurred in
non-volatile memory. Each record provides the following information:
bb date and time of fault
bb origin of fault (under voltage, etc.)
bb faulted phase(s)
bb magnitude of the quantity which lead to the fault
bb magnitude of phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltages
bb magnitude of the zero-sequence voltage (if available)
Disturbance Records
Up to 5 disturbance files are stored in the relays. Even if the total duration is fixed to
15s, it can be fully adjustable for easy adaptation to customer requirements (1s / 3s /
5s / 7s / 9s). They are stored in COMTRADE format. The disturbance recording
function is triggered either by any of the programmed thresholds or by an external
input, or through the communications. All digital and analogical information are
stored in a flash memory and can be transferred using the front communication port
or the rear port to be used by an external data analyser. Disturbance records are
stored on a non volatile flash memory.
EM100053EN
3
Frequency Disturbance Records
Disturbance record analysis
176
One frequency disturbance record, lasting 20 secs can be stored in non-volatile
memory by the MiCOM P923 relay. The sampling frequency is fixed at 1 sample per
cycle. The mechanism that triggers the recording can be configured: instantaneous
or time delayed tripping, activation of a dedicated logic input or time delayed logic
equation signal.
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Control & Monitoring
(cont.)
Circuit breaker status & control
With MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays, the circuit breaker can be controlled
manually via logic inputs (AUX1 and AUX2), with local or remote communication: the
opening and closing commands will therefore activate the programmed output
contacts. The LEDs can be programmed to indicate the status of the circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker maintenance
In addition to protecting and controlling the electrical network, the P922 and P923
relays provides preventive and curative maintenance of the circuit breakers. The
MiCOM P922 and P923 relays monitor the opening / closing time of the circuit
breaker and monitor the number of operations carried out. An alarm is triggered as
soon as the maximum opening or closing time, or the maximum permitted number of
operations is exceeded.
Communications
Two communication ports are available on MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays: A
rear RS485 port for remote communication and a local front RS232 port for local
communication.
A MiCOM S1 Studio software provided for relay setting, record retrieving and
analysis is fully WindowsTM compatible. This support Software allows easy setting of
any MiCOM relay model including P92x.
Remote Communication
The P921, P922 and P923 relays can be ordered with any one of the following
communication protocols.
bb MODBUS™
bb IEC 60870-5-103
The remote RS485 port can be connected to any SCADA or digital control system to
access settings, measurements and alarms as well as all records.
Local Communication
The RS232 port on the front panel of MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays has two
functions:
bb to download a software version to the relay (upgrade, change the language
setting, modify the remote communication protocol, etc.)
bb to connect a PC which has the setting software
NRJED112402EN
177
3
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Setting ranges
Protection functions setting ranges
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
V<= Voltage Set
0.5V
130.0V
0.1V
V<<= Voltage Set
0.5V
130.0V
0.1V
V<<<= Voltage Set
0.5V
130.0V
0.1V
TMS
0.5 s
100.0 s
0.5 s
tRESET (only DT)
0.00 s
100.00 s
0.1 s
tV<
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
tV<<
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
tV<<<
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
1.02%
1.05%
0.01%
V1<= Voltage Set
5.0
130.0V
0.1V
V1<<= Voltage Set
5.0
130.0V
0.1V
TMS
0.5
100.0
0.5
tRESET (only DT)
0s
100.00 s
0.01s
tV1<
0s
599.00s
0.1 s
tV1<<
0s
599.00s
0.1 s
[27] Undervoltage
Threshold settings (secondary values)
Inverse Time Delay Characteristic
Definite time delay characteristics
3
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
[27D] Positive sequence undervoltage (P922 & P923)
Threshold settings (secondary values)
Inverse Time Delay Characteristic
Definite time delay characteristics
Hysteresis
Hysteresis (fixed)
105%
[47] Negative sequence overvoltage (P922 & P923)
Threshold settings (secondary values)
V2>= Voltage Set
5.0V
200.0V
0.1V
V2>>= Voltage Set
5.0V
260.0V
0.1V
TMS
0.5
100.0
0.5
tRESET (only DT)
0s
100.00 s
0.01 s
tV2>
0s
599.00 s
0.1 s
tV2>>
0s
599.00 s
0.1 s
0.95%
0.95%
Inverse Time Delay Characteristic
Definite time delay characteristics
Hysteresis
Hysteresis (fixed)
178
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
MiCOM series 20
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Setting range
Functions
min.
max.
Steps
V>= Voltage Set
0.5V
200.0V
0.1V
V>>= Voltage Set
0.5V
200.0V
0.1V
V>>>= Voltage Se
0.5V
200.0V
0.1V
TMS
0.5
100.0
0.5
tRESET (only DT)
0s
100.00 s
0.01 s
tV>
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
tV>>
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
tV>>>
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
0.95
0.98%
V0>= Voltage Set
0.5V
130.0V
0.1V
V0>>= Voltage Set
0.5V
130.0V
0.1V
V0>>>= Voltage Set
0.5V
130.0V
0.1V
V0der>= Voltage Set
0.5V
130.0V
0.1V
V0der>>= Voltage Set
0.5V
130.0V
0.1V
V0der>>>= Voltage Set
0.5V
130.0V
0.1V
TMS
0.5
100.0
0.5
tRESET (only DT)
0s
100.00 s
0.01 s
tV0>
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
tV0>>
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
tV0>>>
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
0s
599.0 s
0.1 s
[59] Overvoltage
Inverse Time Delay Characteristic
Definite time delay characteristics
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
3
[59N] Residual overvoltage / neutral displacement
Threshold settings (secondary values)
Nominal voltage range: 57 – 130V
Derived voltage range: 57 – 130V (P922 & P923)
Inverse time delay characteristic
Definite time delay characteristics
tV0der>
tV0der>>
P922 / P923 ONLY
tV0der>>>
Hysteresis
Hysteresis (fixed)
0.95
[81U/81O] Under/over frequency (P922 & P923)
Threshold settings
F1 to F6:
Fn – 10Hz
Fn+ 10Hz
0.01Hz
Where: Fn = nominal frequency
Definite time delay characteristics
tF1 to tF6
0s
599.00 s
0.01s
130V or 240V
0.1V
Minimum voltage to unblock Frequency protection (P923 only)
Protection blocking threshold
NRJED112402EN
5 or 20
179
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
10Hz/s
10Hz/s
0.01Hz/s
1
200 cycles
1 cycle
–720.0V
+720.0V
0.5V
T1
0.1 s
10.0 s
0.01 s
U/ T2
Yes/No
[81R] Rate of change of frequency (P923)
Threshold settings
Df/dt1 to df/dt6:
Integration time
Number of cycles to calculate df/dt:
Number of detections for df/dt validation
Number of df/dt for validation
2 or 4
Function (P923)
Function and threshold settings for
T1
1
3
Yes/No
U2
–720.0V
+720.0V
0.5V
T2
0.1 s
10.0 s
0.01 s
U/ T3
Yes/No
U3
–720.0V
+720.0V
0.5V
T3
0.1
10.0s
0.01s
U/ T4
Yes/No
U4
–720.0V
+720.0V
:0.5V
T4
0.1 s
10.0 s
0.01 s
Voltage balance (P923)
Voltage balance per phase and multi-phase
K< function=
Yes/No
K< threshold=
0.50
1
0.01
(common setting for the 3 phases)
Frequency protections configuration (P922 & P923)
Number of cycles for validation of frequency threshold (P923)
1
2
Nr of cycles to calculate df/dt (P923)
1
200
130V or 240V
Minimum voltage to unblock Frequency protection (P923)
5 or 20
Inhibition of “blocking df/dt >20Hz/s” (P923)
Yes/No
Number of DU/DT for fault validation
2
180
0.1V
4
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Setting ranges
(cont.)
Alarm configuration (P922 /P923)
Setting range
Auto-acknowledgement
Yes/No
Alarm for all models
“V>, tV>?”, “V>>,tV>>?” ”V>>>,tV>>>?”
Yes/No
“U<, tU<?”, “U<<,tU<<?” ”U<<<,tU<<<?”
Yes/No
“tAux1?”, “tAux2?”
Yes/No
Boolean equations A to H
Yes/No
P922 & P923 additional alarms
“tAux3?”, “tAux4?” “tAux5” (P922&P923)
Yes/No
Frequency thresholds "F1 ?" to “F6?”
Yes/No
Frequency out of range
Yes/No
VT Supervision
Yes/No
Control trip?
Yes/No
P923 additional alarms
Voltage variation (“DU/Dt1?” to “DU/DT4?”)
Yes/No
Frequency variations “df/dt1?” to “df/dt6?”
Yes/No
Frequency trip AND variation (6 rates)
Yes/No
Voltage balance per phase
Yes/No
Multi-voltage palance (> 2 phases)
Yes/No
3
Control and monitoring functions
setting ranges
Functions
Setting range
min.
max.
Steps
130V
1V
5s
0.05 s
5s
0.05 s
VT Supervision (P922 & P923)
VT Supervision
Yes/No
Detection mode
VTS Input, delta Vr or both
Delta Vr setting - Range (57-130V)
2
CB Supervision (P922 & P923)
CB OPEN Supervision
Yes / No
CB Opening time
0.1 s
CB CLOSE supervision
Yes/No
CB Closing time
0.1 s
NB operation alarm
Yes/No
Nb operations
0
50000
1
Close pulse time
0.1 s
5s
0.05 s
Trip pulse time
0.1 s
5s
0.05 s
Boolean logic equation
b 8 independants equations are available
b Each one can used a maximum of 16 operands among all start and trip signal
b Each one can used NOT, OR, AND, OR NOT, AND NOT logical gates
T operate
0
600s
0.01s
t Reset
0
600s
0.01s
NRJED112402EN
181
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
Presentation
PM103544
User-Machine Interface (HMI)
The user interface for MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays comprises:
bb back-lit, 2 x 16 characters LCD display,
bb four dedicated LEDs to provide information such as “Trip”, “Alarm”, “Warning” and
“Relay Healthy”
bb four programmable LEDs: Each one lights up when protection information is
displayed, or if a logic input state changes
bb five tactile keys for scrolling through the menus and entering settings the
pull-down structure of the menus enables quick and easy access to required
information
bb 1 key for reading and one for acknowledging alarms
Working language
The following languages can be settable in most of the relays:
b French, English, Spanish, Portuguese, Turkish, Polish, Russian, Chinese, Dutch,
German, Italian, Czech, Hungarian and Greek.
3
Wiring
bb Rear (double fast on + M4 screw per connection)
bb Full draw-out with automatic CT shorting in the case of the relay
Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the
rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of
two ring terminals per relay terminal.
Communication
b RS485 rear communication port
All MiCOM relays have an RS485 rear communication port.The terminals 29-30-31-32 are dedicated to the RS485 communication port. b RS232 front communication port (P921, P922, P923)
MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays provide a RS 232 communication port. This port is dedicated to Setting software MiCOM S1 Studio.
Type Port
Physical Link
Connectors
RS485
Rear port
Screened
twister pair
Screws or snap-on
USB / RS232
Front port
Screened
twister pair
PC interface DIN
41652 connector
(x6), Type D_SUB,
9_PIN
182
The cable between the relay and the PC is a standard RS 232 shielded-cable. The relay requires a RS232 cable with a 9-pin male connector.
Data Rate
Comms. mode
Protocol
b 9600 or 19200
b Stop bit:
0 or 1 or 2
b Parity:
Without/Odd/Even
b IEC60870-5-103
b 300 to 38400 bits/s
b 1200 to 38400 bits/s
b 19200
b Data Bit:8
b Stop bit: 1
b Parity: Without
b ModBus RTU
b ModBus RTU
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Base Unit
(cont.)
Dimensions & weight
Case
The chassis is normally secured in the case by four
screws (Self tap screws 6x1,4), to ensure good
seating. The fixing screws should be fitted in normal
service (do not add washers). Do not discard these
screws.
177
158.74
156
DM101195EN
102.4
All the models of the MiCOM P92x range have a 4U
draw out metal case, and can be flush-mounted in
switchboard or panel or rack-mounted. External
connections are made via MIDOS type terminal blocks.
Each connection includes two 4.8 mm Faston and one
M4 screw fixing.
98.31
96.3
29.6
b Width
102.4 mm (20TE)
b Depth
247.1 mm
13.1
10.5
13.1
N.4
25.1
168
approx. 2Kg
159
Weight
b P921/P922/P923
3
51.82
10
177 mm
4.5
b Height
247.1
222
Dimensions
3.4
N.4
4.4
99
NRJED112402EN
183
MiCOM series 20
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
Base Unit
(cont.)
PM103544
Front panel description
3
1
Top cover
2
Clear key)
3
Read key
4
Key pad (cursor keys)
5
Fixed function LEDs
6
User programmable function LEDs
7
Plastic cover
8
Battery (not used)
9
Comms front port (RS232)
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
9
7
184
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P921 / P922 / P923
MiCOM series 20
Base Unit
(cont.)
DM101214EN
MiCOM P921, P922 and P923
case connection diagram
3VTs configuration (Phase-Neutral) + residual VT Connection
(Scheme representing MiCOM relay off)
A
C
Power supply
B
+
-
33
WD
34
Phase rotation
RL1
MiCOM P92x
RL3
RL4
20
18
RL4
44
45
RL5
3
1
RL5
46
49
RL6
7
5
RL6
RL7
9
11
RL7
RL8
13
15
RL8
50
EL2
EL3
EL4
+ 22
4 programmables LEDs
28
+ 17
19
+ 21
23
27
Notes :
(1) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay
(2) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay
Scheme representing MiCOM relay off
NRJED112402EN
3
LEDs
24
+ 26
See note 2
29
(*)
* 30
31
+ 25
EL5
RL1
16
14
See note 1
Watchdog
Output contacts (programmables)
6
4
2
RL3
42
43
EL1
Relay failed
RL2
41
Programmable inputs
Relay healthy
12
10
8
RL2
See note 3
37
35
36
32
+
_
Earth
connection
Communication port
RS485
(* System end resistance.
For last relay, connect 30 and 32 together)
185
TOOLS
This international site allows you
to access all the Schneider Electric
products in just 2 clicks
via comprehensive range datasheets, with direct links to:
ppcomplete library: technical
documents, catalogs, FAQs,
brochures…
pp selection guides from
the e-catalog.
ppproduct discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also find illustrated
overviews, news to which you
can subscribe, the list of country
contacts…
This animated tool helps you to select
the best Automation Intelligent
Electronic Device adapted to your
need. This CD includes description
of all Schneider Electric IEDs ranges
(Sepam, MiCOM, VAMP, Easergy).
This selector is also included in the
Schneider Electric web site.
DM101166EN
Automation panorama
Energy Automation
Panorama 2012
Ene
Pan rgy A
o ra u t o m
ma
a
201 tion
2
PE88096
4
schneider-electric.com
186
NRJED112402EN
Order form
MiCOM series 10
MiCOM series 20
Range description
NRJED112402EN
5
MiCOM series 10
25
MiCOM series 20
99
Order form
187
MiCOM series 10
188
MiCOM P111
188
MiCOM P115
190
MiCOM P116
191
MiCOM series 20
193
MiCOM P12x
MiCOM P122 / MiCOM P123
MiCOM P127
193
193
194
MiCOM P22x
195
MiCOM P220
MiCOM P225
195
196
MiCOM P521
197
MiCOM P92x
198
MiCOM P921 / MiCOM P922 / MiCOM P923
198
187
4
MiCOM P111
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical MiCOM
configurations ordered
This order form can be used to define a complete MiCOM configuration.
Check the boxes
that match your choices.
b Please indicate the Catalogue No. (for example: REL10010) to your Schneider Electric correspondant.
For other variant please contact your Schneider Electric correspondant.
MiCOM P111 ordering variants
Catalog No.
Description
Cortec type (see below)
Model L: No Binary Inputs, 4 Binary Outputs
REL10000
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-2 Ion
Vx = 24-240Vac/250Vdc;
P111L1N0N92N0NN11N
REL10001
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.05-12Ion
Vx = 24-240Vac/250Vdc
P111L1N3N92N0NN11N
Model L: No Binary Inputs, 4 Binary Outputs, RS485 comm. port included
REL10002
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-2 Ion
Vx = 24-240Vac/250Vdc
P111L1N0N92N1NN11N
REL10003
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.05-12Ion
Vx = 24-240Vac/250Vdc
P111L1N3N92N1NN11N
Model N: No Binary Inputs, 6 Binary Outputs
4
REL10020
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-2Ion
Vx = 24-240Vac/250Vdc
P111N1N0N92N1NN11N
REL10021
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.05-12Ion
Vx = 24-240Vac/250Vdc
P111N1N3N92N1NN11N
Model B: 4 Binary Inputs; 4 Binary Outputs
REL10040
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-2 Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc
P111B1N0N91N1NN11N
REL10041
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-2 Ion
Vx = 90-240Vac/250Vdc
P111B1N0N92N1NN11N
REL10042
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.05-12Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc
P111B1N3N91N1NN11N
REL10043
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.05-12Ion
Vx = 90-240Vac/250Vdc
P111B1N3N92N1NN11N
Model A: 4 Binary Inputs, 8 Binary Outputs
REL10010
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-2Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc
P111A1N0N91N1NN11N
REL10011
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-2Ion
Vx = 90-240Vac/250Vdc
P111A1N0N92N1NN11N
REL10012
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.05-12Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc
P111A1N3N91N1NN11N
REL10013
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.05-12Ion
Vx = 90-240Vac/250Vdc
P111A1N3N92N1NN11N
Model E: 8 Binary Inputs; 6 Binary Outputs
REL10050
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-2 Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc
P111E1N0N91N1NN11N
REL10051
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-2 Ion
Vx = 90-240Vac/250Vdc
P111E1N0N92N1NN11N
REL10052
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.05-12Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc
P111E1N3N91N1NN11N
REL10053
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.05-12Ion
Vx = 90-240Vac/250Vdc
P111E1N3N92N1NN11N
REL10054
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-12 Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc
P111E1N4N91N1NN11N
REL10055
Ion = 1A/5A ; 0.01-12 Ion
Vx = 90-240Vac/250Vdc
P111E1N4N92N1NN11N
188
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P111
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
(cont.)
MiCOM P111 ordering variants
Catalog No.
Description
Cortec type (see below)
Accessories for P111
REL10030
Adapter for standard case of P111 to allow mounting the relay on a wall
REL10031
Front cover for Px11 preventing from unauthorised access
b Check the corresponding Cortec code
Model
L
No Binary Inputs, 4 Binary Outputs
N
No Binary Inputs, 6 Binary Outputs
B
4 Binary Inputs, 4 Binary Outputs
A
4 Binary Inputs, 8 Binary Outputs
E
8 Binary Inputs, 6 Binary Outputs
4
Earth current input
0
Ion = 1 A/5A (selectable via HMI); 0.01 – 2 Ion
3
Ion = 1 A/5A (selectable via HMI); 0.05 – 12 Ion
4
Model E special range:
Ion = 1 A/5A (selectable via HMI); 0.01 – 12 Ion
Vx Auxiliary Voltage Supply
1
Model B, A , E: 24 - 60 Vac/dc
2
Model B, A, E: 90 - 240 Vac/250 Vdc
2
Model L, N: 24 - 240 Vac/250 Vdc
Communication port / protocol
0
1
Model L: Without USB port and RS485
Model N, B, A, E: USB port and RS485 with settable
switching between Modbus and IEC103 via HMI
Model L: rear port RS485 with settable switching
between Modbus and IEC103 via HMI
Language
1
P111
1
NRJED112402EN
N
N
9
N
N
N
English/ German/ French/ Spanish/ Russian/ Turkish/
Polish
1
N
189
MiCOM P115
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical MiCOM
configurations ordered
This order form can be used to define a complete MiCOM configuration.
Check the boxes
that match your choices.
b Please indicate the Catalogue No. (for example: REL10100) to your Schneider Electric correspondant.
For other variant please contact your Schneider Electric correspondant.
MiCOM P115 ordering variants
4
Cortec type
(see below)
Catalog No.
Description
REL10100
In =1A; 0.2 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 2 Ion
Vx = 60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P11574611110001
REL10101
In =1A; 0.2 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 2 Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/dc
P11574611111001
REL10102
In =1A; 0.2 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.05 – 10 Ion
Vx = 60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P11574611110101
REL10103
In =1A; 0.2 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.05 – 10 Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/dc
P11574611111101
REL10104
In =5A; 0.2 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 2 Ion
Vx = 60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P11574611110311
REL10105
In =5A; 0.2 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 2 Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/dc
P11574611111311
REL10106
In = 5A ; 0.05-10 Ion
Ion = 5 A; 0.05 – 10 Ion
Vx = 60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P11574611110411
REL10107
In = 5A ; 0.05-10 Ion
Ion = 5 A; 0.05 – 10 Ion
Vx = 24-60Vac/dc
P11574611111411
REL10108
In = 5A ; 0.05-10 Ion
Ion = 5 A; 0.05 – 10 Ion
no auxiliary voltage
P11574611112411
b Check the corresponding Cortec code
Supply mode: dual powering (CTs and auxiliary voltage
Vx) or single powering (CTs only)
Note
The above ordering
variants have:
0
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
1
Vx=24-60Vac/dc
2
Self powering: no auxiliary voltage
Earth current input
0
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 2 Ion
1
Ion = 1 A; 0.05 – 10 Ion
b language set: English/
German/Polish/French/
Spanish
3
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 2 Ion
4
Ion = 5 A; 0.05 – 10 Ion
b energy output for
sensitive CB coil/striker:
12-24Vdc/0.1J or MiTOP
Phase current inputs
b flush mounting case
b dual powering (CTs
and auxiliary voltage Vx)
0
In=1A; 0.2 – 40 In
1
In=5A; 0.2 – 40 In
Language
1
P115
190
7
4
6
1
1
1
1
English/ German/ French/ Spanish/ Polish
1
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P116
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical MiCOM
configurations ordered
This order form can be used to define a complete MiCOM configuration.
Check the boxes
that match your choices.
b Please indicate the Catalogue No. (for example: REL10200) to your Schneider Electric correspondant.
For other variant please contact your Schneider Electric correspondant.
MiCOM P116 ordering variants
Catalog No.
Cortec type
(see below)
Description
Model A: Standard variant - Flush mounted
REL10200
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P116A1N1N15115111N
REL10201
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx=24-60Vac/dc
P116A1N1N14115111N
REL10202
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P116A1N2N15115111N
REL10203
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=24-60Vac/dc
P116A1N2N14115111N
REL10204
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P116A1N5N25115111N
REL10205
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=24-60Vac/dc
P116A1N5N24115111N
REL10206
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.10 – 40 Ion
Vx=24-60Vac/dc
P116A1N3N14111111N
REL10207
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P116A1N2N15111111N
REL10208
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P116A1N5N25111111N
Model A: Standard variant - Withdrawable solution
REL10210
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P116A1N1N15115111W
REL10211
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx=24-60Vac/dc
P116A1N1N14115111W
REL10212
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P116A1N2N15115111W
REL10213
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=24-60Vac/dc
P116A1N2N14115111W
REL10214
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P116A1N5N25115111W
REL10215
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx=24-60Vac/dc
P116A1N5N24115111W
REL10216
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
P116A1N1N15111111W
Model L: Without auxiliary voltage - Flush mounted
REL10300
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N1N13NN1111N
REL10301
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N2N13NN1111N
REL10302
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.1 – 40 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N3N13NN1111N
REL10303
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N1N23NN1111N
REL10304
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N2N23NN1111N
REL10305
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N5N23NN1111N
REL10306
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.1 – 40 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N6N23NN1111N
REL10307
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N4N23NN1111N
Model L: Without auxiliary voltage - Withdrawable solution
REL10310
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N1N13NN1111W
REL10311
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N2N13NN1111W
REL10312
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.1 – 40 Ion
IVx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N3N13NN1111W
REL10313
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N1N23NN1111W
REL10314
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N2N23NN1111W
REL10315
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N5N23NN1111W
REL10316
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5A; 0,1 - 40 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N6N23NN1111W
REL10317
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Ion = 5 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Vx= no auxiliary voltage
P116L1N4N23NN1111W
NRJED112402EN
191
4
MiCOM P116
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
b Check the corresponding
Cortec code
P116 Model A
Earth current input
Note
The above ordering
variants are for Model A
equipped with:
b 1 or 5 electro-magnetic
flags
1
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
2
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
3
Ion = 1 A; 0.10 – 40 Ion
5
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Phase current inputs
b RS485 with settable
switching between
Modbus or IEC103 in
HMI
1
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
2
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Auxiliary supply
Dual Powered (CT and Vx Auxiliary Voltage)
b Universal binary
inputs:
24-240Vac or 24-250Vdc
b Language:
English/German/French/
Spanish/Portuguese/
Russian/Turkish
4
Vx=24-60Vac/dc
5
Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
Electro magnetic flags on the front panel
1
One trip flag indicator
5
Four additianal electro magnetic flags
Case (Mounting solution)
4
P116
A
1
N
N
1
1
W
Basic flush mounting case with the cassette for
withdrawable solution
N
Basic flush mounting case
1
b Check the corresponding
1
1
Earth current input
Cortec code
P116 Model L
1
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
2
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
3
Ion = 1 A; 0.10 – 40 Ion
4
Ion= 5 A; 0,002 - 1 Ion
5
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
b no communication
6
Ion = 5 A; 0.1 – 40 Ion
b no binary inputs
Phase current inputs
Note
The above ordering
variants are for Model L
equipped with:
b 2 binary outputs
b 1 electro magnetic flag
b Language:
English/German/French/
Spanish/Portuguese/
Russian/Turkish
P116
192
L
1
N
1
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
2
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Case (Mounting solution)
N
3
N
N
1
W
Basic flush mounting case with the cassette for
withdrawable solution
N
Basic flush mounting case
1
1
1
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P122 - P123
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical MiCOM
configurations ordered
This order form can be used to define a complete MiCOM configuration.
that match your choices.
Check the boxes
b Please indicate the Catalogue No. (for example: REL21202) to your Schneider Electric correspondant.
For other variant please contact your Schneider Electric correspondant.
MiCOM P122 ordering variants
Catalog No.
Description
Cortec type (see below)
REL21201
Ion = 1A; 0,1 - 40 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P122A00Z112CE0
REL21202
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P122B00Z112CE0
REL21203
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC 60870-5-103
P122B00Z312CE0
MiCOM P123 ordering variants
Catalog No.
Description
Cortec type (see below)
REL21301
Ion = 1A; 0,1 - 40 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P123A00Z112CE0
REL21302
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P123B00Z112CE0
REL21303
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC 60870-5-103
P123B00Z312CE0
4
b Check the corresponding Cortec code
Model
2
MiCOM P122
3
MiCOM P123
Earth current input
A
Ion = 1A; 0,1 - 40 Ion
B
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Voltage inputs
0
None
Optional features
0
None
Communication protocol
1
Modbus
3
IEC 60870-5-103
Language
1
P12
0
0 Z
1
2
C
E
English (*)
0
* Working language
The following languages can be settable from the keypad:
b French/English/Spanish/Portuguese/Turkish/Polish/Russian/
Chinese/Dutch/German/Italian/Czech/Hungarian/Greek
NRJED112402EN
193
MiCOM P127
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical MiCOM
configurations ordered
This order form can be used to define a complete MiCOM configuration.
that match your choices.
Check the boxes
b Please indicate the Catalogue No. (for example: REL21702 to your Schneider Electric correspondant.
For other variant please contact your Schneider Electric correspondant.
MiCOM P127 ordering variants
Catalog No.
Description
Cortec type (see below)
REL21701
Ion = 1A; 0,1 - 40 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P127AA0Z112FB0
REL21702
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P127BA0Z112FB0
REL21703
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC 60870-5-103
P127BA0Z312FB0
Additional 5 digital inputs
REL21704
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P127BA1Z112FB0
REL21705
Ion = 1A; 0,1 - 40 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC 60870-5-103
P127BA1Z312FB0
Irig B inputs + additional 2nd rear port
4
REL21706
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P127BA2Z112FB0
REL21707
Ion = 1A; 0,01 - 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC 60870-5-103
P127BA2Z312FB0
b Check the corresponding Cortec code
Earth current input
A
Ion = 1A; 0,1 - 40 Ion
B
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Voltage inputs
A
57-130 V
Optional features
0
None
1
Additional 5 digital inputs
2
Irig B inputs + addit. 2nd rear port
Communication protocol
1
Modbus/Modbus (if addit. 2nd rear port)
3
IEC60870-5-103/Modbus (if addit. 2nd rear port)
Language
1
P127
A
Z
1
2
F
B
English (*)
0
* Working language
The following languages can be settable from the keypad:
b French/English/Spanish/Portuguese/Turkish/Polish/Russian/
Chinese/Dutch/German/Italian/Czech/Hungarian/Greek
194
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P220
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical MiCOM
configurations ordered
This order form can be used to define a complete MiCOM configuration.
that match your choices.
Check the boxes
b Please indicate the Catalogue No. (for example: REL22003) to your Schneider Electric correspondant.
For other variant please contact your Schneider Electric correspondant.
MiCOM P220 ordering variants
Catalog No.
Description
Cortec type (see below)
REL22001
Ion = 1A; 0,002 to 1 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P220C00Z11200BA
REL22003
Ion = 1A; 0,002 to 1 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC60870-5-103
P220C00Z31200BA
REL22002
Ion = 1A; 0,002 to 1 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P220C00Z112A0BA
REL22004
IIon = 1A; 0,002 to 1 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC60870-5-103
P220C00Z312A0BA
6 RTDs Monitoring
b Check the corresponding Cortec code
Earth current input
C
4
0,002 to 1 Ion
Voltage inputs
0
None
Communication protocol
1
Modbus
3
IEC 60870-5-103
Optional temperature monitoring
0
None
A
6 RTDs monitoring
Language
1
P220
C
0
0
Z
1
2
0
B
English (*)
A
* Working language
The following languages can be settable from the keypad:
b French/English/Spanish/Portuguese/Turkish/Polish/Russian/
Chinese/Dutch/German/Italian/Czech/Hungarian/Greek
NRJED112402EN
195
MiCOM P225
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical MiCOM
configurations ordered
This order form can be used to define a complete MiCOM configuration.
that match your choices.
Check the boxes
b Please indicate the Catalogue No. (for example: REL22502) to your Schneider Electric correspondant.
For other variant please contact your Schneider Electric correspondant.
MiCOM P225 ordering variants
Catalog No.
Description
Cortec type (see below)
REL22501
Ion = 1A; 0,002 to 1 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P225CA0Z11200BA
REL22503
Ion = 1A; 0,002 to 1 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC60870-5-103
P225CA0Z31200BA
10 RTDs Monitoring
REL22502
Ion = 1A; 0,002 to 1 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P225CA0Z112A0BA
REL22504
Ion = 1A; 0,002 to 1 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC60870-5-103
P225CA0Z312A0BA
b Check the corresponding Cortec code
Earth current input
4
C
0,002 to 1 Ion
Voltage inputs
A
57-130 V
Communication protocol
1
Modbus/Modbus
3
IEC 60870-5-103/modbus
Optional temperature monitoring
0
None
A
10 RTDs monitoring
Language
1
P225
C
A
0
Z
1
2
0
B
English (*)
A
* Working language
The following languages can be settable from the keypad:
b French/English/Spanish/Portuguese/Turkish/Polish/Russian/
Chinese/Dutch/German/Italian/Czech/Hungarian/Greek
196
NRJED112402EN
MiCOM P521
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical MiCOM
configurations ordered
This order form can be used to define a complete MiCOM configuration.
Check the boxes
that match your choices.
b Please indicate the Catalogue No. (for example: REL25103) to your Schneider Electric correspondant.
For other variant please contact your Schneider Electric correspondant.
MiCOM P521 ordering variants
Catalog No.
Description
Cortec type (see below)
Protection communication: EIA (RS) 485 single channel
REL25101
Ion = 1A; 0,01 to 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P521B0BZ112DA0
REL25102
Ion = 1A; 0,01 to 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC60870-5-103
P521B0BZ312DA0
Protection communication: 1300 nm single mode/single channel
REL25103
Ion = 1A; 0,01 to 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P521B0GZ112DA0
REL25104
Ion = 1A; 0,01 to 8 Ion
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC60870-5-103
P521B0GZ312DA0
4
b Check the corresponding Cortec code
Protection communication
B
EIA (RS) 485 single channel
G
1300 nm single mode / single channel
Communication protocol
1
Modbus
3
IEC 60870-5-103
Language
1
P521
B
0
Z
1
2
D
A
English (*)
0
* Working language
The following languages can be settable from the keypad:
b French/English/Spanish/Portuguese/Turkish/Polish/Russian/
Chinese/Dutch/German/Italian/Czech/Hungarian/Greek
NRJED112402EN
197
MiCOM P921 - P922 - P923
Order form
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical MiCOM
configurations ordered
This order form can be used to define a complete MiCOM configuration.
that match your choices.
Check the boxes
b Please indicate the Catalogue No. (for example: REL29101) to your Schneider Electric correspondant.
For other variant please contact your Schneider Electric correspondant.
MiCOM P92x ordering variants
Catalog No.
Description
Cortec type (see below)
Model 1: P921 voltage relay
REL29101
Vrange = 57-130 V
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P9210ASZ112CC0
REL29102
Vrange = 57-130 V
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC60870-5-103
P9210ASZ312CC0
Model 2: P922 voltage / frequency relay
REL29201
Vrange = 57-130 V
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P9220ASZ112CC0
REL29202
Vrange = 57-130 V
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC60870-5-103
P9220ASZ312CC0
Model 3: P923 voltage / frequency relay with (df / dt) relay
4
REL29301
Vrange = 57-130 V
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Modbus
P9230ASZ112CC0
REL29302
Vrange = 57-130 V
Vx = 24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
IEC60870-5-103
P9230ASZ312CC0
b Check the corresponding Cortec code
Model
1
P921 voltage relay
2
P922 voltage / frequency relay
3
P923 voltage / frequency relay with (df / dt) relay
Voltage input
A
57-130 V
Auxiliary voltage
Z
24-250 Vdc / 48-240 Vac
Communication protocol
1
Modbus
3
IEC 60870-5-103
Language
1
P92
0
A
S
Z
1
2
C
C
English (*)
0
* Working language
The following languages can be settable from the keypad:
b French/English/Spanish/Portuguese/Turkish/Polish/Russian/
Chinese/Dutch/German/Italian/Czech/Hungarian/Greek
198
NRJED112402EN
Notes
4
NRJED112402EN
199
35, rue Joseph Monier
CS 30323
F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex (France)
Tel.: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439
Capital social 896 313 776 €
www.schneider-electric.com
NRJED112402EN
As standards, specifications and designs change from time
to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given
in this publication.
Design: Schneider Electric - Sonovision
Photos: Schneider Electric and ©iStockphoto
Printed:
This document has been
printed on recycled paper.
01-2015
© 2015 Schneider - All rights reserved
Schneider Electric Industries SAS
35, rue Joseph Monier
CS 30323
F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex (France)
Tel.: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439
Capital social 928 298 512 €
www.schneider-electric.com
NRJED112402EN
As standards, specifications and designs change from time
to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given
in this publication.
Design: Schneider Electric
Photos: Schneider Electric and ©iStockphoto
This document has been
printed on recycled paper.
03-2015
© 2015 Schneider Electric - All rights reserved
Schneider Electric
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement